2020年英语语法大全

2020年10月21日发(作者：陶虹)

2020年英语语法大全

考试必备 英语语法
什么是语法？语法就是造句的方法。
学习语法就是为了我们能够造出无数优美、正确的英语句子。
学习英语语法的步骤：
1. 九大句子成分和六大基本句型结构；
2. 十六种时态及十种被动语态;
3. 名词性从句（包括主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句）;
4. 定语从句;
5. 状语从句；
6. 直接引语和间接引语；
7. 情态动词；
8. 虚拟语气；
9. 非谓语动词；
10. 强调句；
11. 主谓一致；
12. 省略句；
13. 冠词、名词、动词、代词、形容词、副词、介词等的用法。
下面我们一项一项进行学习：
一、九大句子成分
九大句子成分：主语、谓语、宾语 、表语、定语、状语、补语（宾语补足语）、同位语、
呼语。（主、谓、宾、表、定、状、补、同、呼）
1. 主语：
A. 在主谓宾结构中，主语是谓语动词动作的发出者；
B. 在主系表结构中，主语是系动词之前的部分；
C. 在There be结构中，主语是系动词be之后的部分。
（由名词、名词短语、代词、数词、不定式、V-ing形式和主语从句充当）
我是教师。
他们在踢足球。
熊猫是种可爱的动物。
一个淘气的孩子打碎了我的车窗。
打篮球是我的爱好。
掌握英语是我今年的目标。

练习弹钢琴每天要花费我一个小时的时间。
他昨天的所作所为令人生气。
Knowledge is power.
A beautiful girl told me the news.
He helped me a lot.
To master English is my goal this year.
Practicing playing the piano takes me an hour a day.
What he did yesterday made his parents angry.
2. 谓语：在主谓宾结构中，表示主语所发出的动作。
(由动词构成，包括16种时态和10种被动语态）
我种了一棵树。
他养了一只狗。
一只黄鼠狼偷吃了我的大公鸡。
一个淘气的孩子打碎了我的车窗。
小红赢了比赛。
我买了本新版英语字典。
我每天练习弹钢琴。
他昨天抓住了一个小偷。
I like English.
She keeps a cute monkey as her pet.
She loves him.
He refused to help.
I enjoy learning English.
I don’t know when you will leave for New York.
补充知识：
1）根据动词在句中的功能，可分为四类：
实意动词(Notional Verb): 是具有实际动作意义的词，可以直接跟宾语或加介词后跟宾
语。
We work hard.
I play football every day.
I bought a book yesterday.
系动词(Link Verb):
是连接主语和表语以及帮助实意动词构成各种时态及疑问句、否定句、被动语态的词。
有: be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been等。
She is five.
We were in Xi’an last evening.
The house has been sold by its owner.
1

考试必备
My bike is being repaired by my father now.
助动词(Auxiliary Verb): 是帮助实意动词构成各种时态及疑问句、否定句的词。
英语语法
他昨天抓住了一个小偷。
I like English.
She keeps a cute monkey as her pet.
She loves him.
He refused to help.
I enjoy learning English.
I want to know when you will leave for New York.
宾语可分为四类：

有: do, does, did, have, has, had等 。
She didn’t do her homework yesterday.
Do you like English?
I have been a teacher for fifteen years.
Had you finished your homework when your mother got home last evening?
情态动词(Modal Verb): 是一种本身有一定的词义，表示说话人的情绪，态度或语气的< br>动词，但不能单独作谓语，只能和其他动词原形构成谓语、否定句及疑问句。
有: can (could), may (might), must, need, ought to, dare (dared), shall (should),
will (would), had better, would rather等。
You must learn it by yourself.
I would rather stay at home than go to the cinema.
Can you swim?
Shall we have a party this weekend?
Who can help me learn English?
说明：有些情况下，有些动词是兼类词，例如:
We are having a meeting. （having是实义动词）
They have gone to New York.（have是助动词。）
2）动词根据其后是否带有宾语，可分为两类，分别是：
及物动词(Transitive Verb): 可以直接跟宾语的动词；
不及物动词(Intransitive Verb): 加了介词之后才能跟宾语的动词。
缩写形式分别为vt. 和vi.。
I live in this bedroom. 不及物动词 (vi.)
I study English hard. 及物动词 (vt.)
3. 宾语：在主谓宾结构中，谓语动词动作的承受者。
（由名词、名词短语、代词、数词、不定式、V-ing形式和宾语从句充当）
我种了一棵树。
他养了一只狗。
一只黄鼠狼偷吃了我的大公鸡。
一个淘气的孩子打碎了我的车窗。
小红赢了比赛。
我买了本新版英语字典。
我每天练习弹钢琴。

1） 动作的承受者——动词宾语：
I like China. （名词）
He hates you. （代词）
How many do you need? We need two. （数词）
We should help the old and the poor. （the + adj.）
I enjoy working with you. （动名词）
I hope to see you again. （不定式）
Did you write down what he said? （宾语从句）
2） 介词后的名词、代词和动名词——介词宾语：
Are you afraid of the snake?
I am interested in this book.
3） 双宾语——
间接宾语
（指人或动物）和直接宾语（指物）：
He gave me a book yesterday.
Give the poor man some money.
She taught me English for three years.
4) it 作形式宾语：
I find it interesting to learn English.
She makes it a rule to read English every morning.
We don’t think it possible to defeat them.
4. 表语：在主系表结构中，跟在系动词之后对主语进行修饰说明的部分。
（由名词、名词短语、代词、数词、形容词、副词、介词短语、不定式、V-ing形
式、过去分词和表语从句充当）
我是学生。
那是一只狗。
失败是成功之母。
她很漂亮。
我很忙。
他们聪明又努力。
2

考试必备
我的爱好是打羽毛球。
我想知道的是他怎么英语那么好。
Knowledge is power.
She is a hard-working student.
The person that she wants to marry is him.
My aim is to go to a famous university.
My job is teaching English to young children.
We are excited.
What I want to know is how he can learn English so well.
补充知识：
英语语法
注意：可带名词作表语的系动词be,
become, make, look, sound, fall, prove,
remain, turn等。注意：turn后接的单数名词 前多不用冠词。


7） 系动词无被动语态： appear, be, become, fall, feel, get, grow, keep,
look, remain, seem, smell, sound, stay, taste, turn例如：
It sounds good.
The dish smells delicious.
He fell ill last night.
5. 定语：用来修饰或限定一个名词的词、短语或从句。














（由名词、冠词、代词、形容词、不定式、V-ing形式、过去分词和定语从句充当）



















一位男老师将教我们英语。
那是一个宁静的夜晚。
我有很多事情要做。
坐在那里的男孩是我的朋友。
在事故中被压死的狗是他的。
他就是我昨天在公园见到的那个老外。
我昨天丢的笔找到了。
1） 状态系动词： 用来表示主语的状态，只有be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been
等词，例如：
He is a teacher.
We are students.
He has been ill for three years.
Tom is in Xi’an.
2） 持续系动词： 用来表示主语继续或保持一种状况或态度，主要有keep , rest ,
remain, stay, lie, stand等词，例如：
He always kept silent at meetings.
This matter rests a mystery.
The village stands at the foot of the hill.
Japan lies to the east of China.
3） 表像系动词：用来表示看起来像这一概念，主要有seem, appear, look等词，例
如：




He looks tired. 他看起来很累。
He seems (to be) very sad. 他看起来很伤心。
This kind of cloth feels very soft. 这种布手感很软。
This flower smells very sweet. 这朵花闻起来很香。
4）感官系动词：感官系动词主要有feel, smell, sound, taste等词，例如：
我想上的大学是北大。
A man doctor will take care of you.
This girl is my best friend.
I have a lot of homework to do today.
The boy standing there is my brother.
The dog killed in the accident belonged to my grandpa.
The pen which I lost yesterday was given to me as a birthday gift by
my mum.
英语中的定语和汉语 中的定语的最大差别在于它所处的位置，汉语中无论是词、短
语或句子作定语时，都放在被修饰词之前， 而英语中，只有单个的词或复合形容词作定语时
才放在被修饰词之前，其它情况全部放在被修饰词之后。 英语中的定语种类有十余种，下面
我们分类学习：
1）单个的名词、形容词、数词、代词、V-ing、P.P.及复合形容词作定语，放在被修
饰词前。
a man doctor a woman teacher a boy student
a beautiful girl a lovely baby a nice present
three toys five people eight elephants
this book those pens my brother
boiling water an exciting game a swimming pool
the sleeping baby a dancing cat the shouting crowd
3
a baby girl
an honest boy
nine years
your sister
a reading room
the crying girl
5）变化系动词：这些系动词表示主语变成什么样，变化系动词主要有become, grow,
turn, fall, get, go, come, run等词，例如：
He became mad after that.
She grew rich within a short time.
6）终止系动词：表示主语已终止动作，主要有prove, turn out等词，表达证实，
变成之意，例如：
The rumor proved false.
The search proved difficult.
His plan turned out a success.

考试必备 英语语法
boiled water the excited audience a disappointed mother
a warm-hearted welcome a cold-blooded killer a white-haired woman
2) “什么地方的什么”= the + N. + 介词短语
the picture on the wall 墙上的画儿 the birds in the tree 树上的鸟
the books on the shelf 架子上的书 the hole in the wall 墙上的洞
the cat in the box 盒子里的猫 the lamp over my head 我头顶的灯
the students in our class 我们班的学生
3)“正在做什么的人或物”= the + N + V-ing + (O) + LA + TA
the man standing there 站在那里的男子
the dog barking now 正在吠叫的狗
the girl singing on the stage 正在舞台上唱歌的女孩
the boy swimming in the river 正在河里游泳的男孩
4) “正在被怎么样的人或物”= the + N + being + P.P. + LA + TA
the bridge being built now 正在被建的桥
the meeting being held now 正在被召开的会议
the boy being punished by our teacher 正在被我们老师惩罚的学生
5) “将要被怎么样的人或物”= the + N + to be + P.P. + LA + TA
the meeting to be held tomorrow morning 明早将要被召开的会议
the student to be sent to America by our school 将被我们学校送往美国的学生
the school to be set up in the village 将被建在这个村子里的学校
6) “已经被怎么样的人或物”= the + N + P.P. + LA + TA
the man killed in the accident last night 昨晚在事故中被压死的人
the bridge built last year 去年被建成的桥
the meeting held yesterday 昨天被召开的会议
7) “穿着什么样衣服的人”= the + N + in + aan + 衣服 + LA + TA
the man in a black T-shirt 穿着黑色T恤的男子
the girl in a red mini-skirt 穿着红色迷你裙的女孩
the man in a suit 穿着西服套装的男子
8) “穿着什么颜色衣服的人”= the + N + in + 颜色 + LA + TA
the man in black 穿着黑衣的人 the girl in red 穿着红色衣服的女孩
the woman in blue 穿着蓝色衣服的女士 the boy in green 穿着绿色衣服的男孩
9) 副词做定语一般后置 = the + N + adv.

4
the students here 这里的学生 the man over there 那边的男子
passengers aboard 车（船、飞机）上的乘客
10) 形容词（形容词短语）做后置定语 = the + N + adj. + LA + TA
a room lagre enough to hold 100 people 大到能容纳100人的房间
a basket full of fruits 装满水果的篮子
a boy clever enough to speak three languages 聪明到会说三种语言的男孩
11) “什么什么相同的人或物”= the + N + of + N
a girl of her own age 和她年龄相同的女孩
birds of a feather 相同羽毛的鸟
the bottles of the same shape 相同形状的瓶子
12) “有什么的人或物“ = thea + N + with + N
a girl with long hair 长发女孩 a boy with big eyes 大眼睛的男孩
13) 定语从句= the + N + 引导词 + 从句
The N(人) + whothat + V + O + LA + TA (人主)
The teacher whothat taught me English at this school last year
The thief whothat stole my wallet yesterday
The N(人) + whothat + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA (人主)
The thief whothat was caught by a policeman yesterday
The N(人) + (whomthat) + S + V + LA + TA (人宾)
The girl (whomthat) I met in the park yesterday
The old man (whomthat) I helped yesterday
The N(物) + whichthat + V + O + LA + TA (物主)
The dog whichthat bit me in the park yesterday
The horse whichthat ran away last week
The N(物) + whichthat + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA (物主)
The dog whichthat was killed in the accident yesterday
The N(物) + (whichthat) + S + V + LA + TA (物宾)
The book (whichthat) I bought yesterday
The dog (whichthat) I saw yesterday
The N(人,物) + whose + N + V + O + LA + TA (人,物,所属)
The man whose son is a doctor in this hospital
The room whose door is green
Such + N + as + S + V + LA +TA
Such people as I got to know in America last year
Such books as I bought yesterday
The same + N + as + S + V + LA +TA
The same bike as I lost yesterday
So + adj. + aan + N + as + S + V + LA +TA
So clever a boy as all the teachers like

考试必备 英语语法
The N(时间) + (whichthat) + S + V + LA + TA (先行词作宾语)
The year (whichthat) I spent in America
The N(时间) + when介词+which + S + V + O + LA (先行词作状语)
The year whenin which I studied English in America
The N(地点) + (whichthat) + S + V + TA (先行词作宾语)
The museum (whichthat) I visited last week
The school (whichthat) we set up in the village
The N(地点) + where介词+which + S + V + O + TA (先行词作状语)
The factory wherein which my father works
The farm whereon which I worked last year
The reason + (whichthat) + S + V + LA + TA (先行词作宾语)
The reason (whichthat) he made up
The reason (whichthat) he told me
The reason + whyfor which + S + V + O + LA + TA (先行词作状语)
The reason whyfor which he didn’t go to school yesterday
The reason whyfor which I punished you

6. 状语：说明谓语动词动作所处的状态（包括时间、地点、 原因、比较、目的、结果、
条件、方式和让步状语）。
（由副词、介词短语、不定式、V-ing形式、过去分词和状语从句充当）
我在那里见到的他。
在一个宁静的夜晚，他们誓血为盟。
由于生病，他没有去上学。
她哼着歌离开了教室。
尽管在下雨，他们继续工作。
即使你给我买票，我也不会跟你去看电影。
为了练习发音，我每天都模仿VOA。
当从山顶看时，我们学校看起来很漂亮。
I met him there.
He studies in a key middle school.
To learn English well, she takes every chance to practice her oral
English.
Seeing from the top of the building, you can see the whole town.
Seen from the top of the building, the town looks beautiful.
I was having dinner when he came to see me last evening.
7. 补语(宾语补足语)：跟在宾语之后对宾语进行补充说明的句子成分。
（由名词、形容词、副词、不定式、V-ing形式、过去分词）
我们选他当班长。
这场激烈的比赛令所有观众都很兴奋。

母亲每天都让我朗读英语。
他让我们等了两个小时。
毛泽东的逝世令举国哀痛。
老师罚我下蹲两百次。
据预测美国民众将再次选奥巴马为总统。
请让我进去。
We will make him monitor.
The good news made us happy.
Please let me in.
My mother gets me to read English every morning.
He kept me waiting for two hours.
The news that our team had won the match made us excited.
8. 同位语：表示同一主体的两个不同的词、短语或从句。
（由名词、名词短语、同位语从句）
我们学生应当努力学习。
我最好的朋友小明将去美国留学。
谁下学期将教我们英语的问题尚未得到答复。
我们队赢了比赛的消息让我们兴奋。
众所周知英语变得越来越重要的事实。
我们明天要考试的消息已经公布了。
我们可以怎样进一步合作的问题将在会议上讨论。
We students should study hard.
Jack, a friend of mine, has been sent abroad to study by our school.
The fact that English is becoming more and more important is known
to everyone.
The question who will teach us English will be answered tomorrow.
9. 呼语：称呼用语。（如：Sir, Your Majesty, Your Highness, Madam等）。

二、六大基本句型结构
英语的基本句型结构只有三种：1. 主谓宾结构；2. 主系表结构；3. There be结构。
主谓宾结构又有可引申出三种：1. 主谓状结构；2. 主谓+双宾语结构；3. 主谓宾+宾补
结构。
1. 主谓宾结构：表示主语做什么；
主语 + 谓语 + 宾语 + 方式状语 + 地点状语 + 时间状语.
S + V + O + MA + LA + TA.
I read English in the classroom every day.
5

考试必备
She plays the piano attentively at home every evening.
2. 主系表结构：表示主语是什么、怎么样、在哪里；
主语 + 系动词 + 表语 + 地点状语 + 时间状语。
S + LV + P + LA + TA.
I am a student in this school now.
She was very beautiful when she was in her twenties.
I was in Beijing last Sunday.
3. There be 结构：表示什么地方有什么；
There be + 主语 + 地点状语 + 时间状语。
There be + S + LA + TA.
There is a book on the desk now.
There was a tree in the yard two years ago.
4. 主语 + 谓语 + (状语).
英语语法
2. 主系表结构的句子扩充：

+

（前置定语）
+ 主语 +
（后置定语
）+ 系动词 +
（前置定语）
+ 表语 +
（后置定语）
（地点状语）
+
（时间状语）
.
The man is my teacher.
The handsome man is my English teacher.
The handsome man who is standing there talking with my mother is my English
teacher that has been teaching me at his home for three years.
3. There be结构的句子扩充：
There be + (
前置定语
) + 主语 +
（后置定语）
+
（地点状语）
+
（时间状语）
.
There is a book on the desk.
There is an English book on the desk.
There is an English book on Chinese history, which was written by a famous British
historian, on the desk that stands near the window.

积木式造句法是英语学习中最简洁明了的造句方法，同学们一定要多加练习、熟练掌握。

S + V + （A）.
She smiles.
He is laughing aloud.
5. 主语 + 谓语 + 直接宾语 + 介词 + 间接宾语 + 地点状语 + 时间状语.
S + V + DO + Prep. + IO + LA + TA.
= 主语 + 谓语 + 间接宾语 + 直接宾语 + 地点状语 + 时间状语.
S + V + IO + DO + LA + TA.
She bought a tie for me last week. = She bought me a tie last week.
Mary gave a book to Tom yesterday. = Mary gave Tom a book yesterday.
6. 主语 ＋ 谓语 ＋ 宾语 ＋ 宾语补足语 + (状语)。
S + V + O + OC + (A).
We made Tom monitor yesterday.
The good news made us happy.
The pain is driving me mad.
My mother gets me to read English every day.
He shot the wolf dead.
下面我们学习通过在基本句型中加入定语、各种状 语等的方式来造复杂的英文句子
的方法。我们将其称为：积木式造句法。
1. 主谓宾结构的句子扩充：
通过这种造句方法我们可以造出大量语法正确、意思清楚地句子，为我们的英 语写作打下坚
实的基础。

三、16种时态及10种被动语态
时态的概念 ：时态用来说明一个动作发生地时间或多个动作发生的时间顺序及所处的状
态。时态分为16种主动语态 和10种被动语态。主动语态是以动作的发出者作主语的句子；
被动语态是以动作的承受着作主语的句子 。下面我们分开进行学习：
16种时态总表及10种被动语态总表

现在
过去
将来
一般 _____ 时 ______ 进行时 ______ 完成时 _____ 完成进行时
一般现在时
一般过去时
一般将来时
现在进行时
过去进行时
将来进行时
现在完成时
过去完成时
将来完成时
现在完成进行时
过去完成进行时
将来完成进行时
过去将来 一般过去将来时 过去将来进行时 过去将来完成时 过去将来完成进行时
注：加粗的10种时态具有被动语态，其余6种则没有。
字母符号的定义： S主语、V 动词原形、V-ing 现在分词、V-ed过去式、P.P. 过去分
词、O宾语、P表语、A定语、MA方式状语、LA地点状语、LV系动词、TA时间状语、OA
其他状语、TP时间段。
十六种时态的主动语态：
1. 一般现在时：以下三种情况使用一般现在时：
6
（时间状语）
+
（前置定语）
+ 主语 +
（后置定语）
+ 谓语 +
（前置定语）
+ 宾语 +
（后
置定语）
+
（地点状语）
+
（时间状语）
.
A boy met a girl.
A handsome boy met a beautiful girl.
A handsome boy who was wearing a black T-shirt met a beautiful girl that was
dressed in a red mini-skirt.
A handsome boy who was wearing a black T-shirt met a beautiful girl that was
dressed in a red miniskirt in the park yesterday.

考试必备
1. 经常发生的动作； 2. 习惯性的动作； 3. 客观事实和真理。
① 主谓宾结构的句子：
a. 陈述句肯定句：表示主语经常或习惯于做什么。
S + V + O + MA + LA + TA.
She plays the piano attentively at home every day.
We read English every day.
b. 陈述句否定式：表示主语经常或习惯于不做什么。
S + don’tdoesn’t + V + O + MA + LA + TA.
I don’t believe you.
We don’t like playing football.
Tom doesn’t speak Chinese.
c. 表示“常常，通常”always, often, sometimes, rarely, frequently, never,
seldom, occasionally, usually, generally…
S + alwaysoftensometimes… + V + O + MA + LA + TA.
S + isaream+alwaysoftensometimes…+ P + LA + TA.
He often comes to see me.
We sometimes stay up late.
My father is always busy.
d. 一般疑问句式：表示主语经常或习惯于做什么吗。
DoDoes + S + V + O + MA + LA + TA?
Yes, S + dodoes. No, S +don’tdoesn’t.

Do you have lunch at home every day?
Yes, I , I don’t.
Does she play the piano at school every day?
Yes, she , she doesn’t.
e. 选择疑问句式： 表示主语经常或习惯于做A还是是做B。
DoDoes + S + V + O1 or O2 + LA + TA?
DoDoes + S + V + O + MA1 or MA2 + LA + TA?
Do you like tea or coffee?
Does your friend play football or basketball?
Do you go to work by bus or by bike?
f. 反义疑问句式：
S + V + O + MA + LA + TA, don’tdoesn’t +S?
Yes, S + dodoes. No, S +don’tdoesn’t.
S + don’tdoesn’t + V + O + MA + LA + TA, dodoes +S?
Yes, S + dodoes. No, S +don’tdoesn’t.
He comes from Norway, doesn’t he?
Yes, he , he doesn’t.
You like English best, don’t you?.
Yes, I , I don’t.
Your father doesn’t smoke, does he?
Yes, he , he doesn’t.

英语语法
He doesn’t speak English, does he?
Yes, he , he doesn’t.
g. 特殊疑问句式：提问主语在什么时间、地点、原因、方式等做什么。
Wh-How + dodoes + S + V + O + MA + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部分)
What does she play at school every day?
Where do you have lunch every day?
h. 否定疑问句：（难道）… 不 … 吗？
Isn’tAren’t + S + P?
Don’tDoesn’t + S + V + O + MA + LA + TA?
Why don’tdoesn’t + S + V + O + MA + LA + TA?
Why aren’tisn’t + S + P?
Why aren’tisn’t + there + S +LA + TA?
Isn’t that your girl friend?
Aren’t you busy today?
Don’t you know I love you so much?
Why don’t you tell him the truth?
Why isn’t there a bridge over the river?
i. 习惯了……
S + begetbecome + used to (doing) + O + LA + TA.
S + begetbecome + accustomed to (doing) + O + LA + TA.
He is used to living alone.
He becomes used to loneliness.
He is accustomed to getting up early.
j. 祈使句句式：
V + O + LA + TA, please.
Don’t + V + O + LA + TA, please.
Open the door, please.
Don’t tell your mother I drank beer just now, please.
k. 祈使句的反义疑问句式：
V + O + LA + TA, willwon’t you?
Don’t + V + O + LA + TA, will you?
Let’s + V + O + LA + TA, shall we?
Let us + V + O + LA + TA, will you?
Go to the cinema with me this evening, willwon’t you?
Don’t open the door, will you?
Let’s go to the cinema, shall we?
Let us help them, will you?
② 主系表结构的句子：
a. 陈述句肯定句式：表示主语现在或当前是什么、怎么样、在哪里。
S + amisare + P + LA + TA.
She is a student.
They are intelligent.
7

考试必备
b. 陈述句否定句式：表示主语现在或当前不是什么、不怎么样、不在哪里。
S + amisare + not + P + LA + TA.
= S + am notisn’taren’t + P + LA + TA.
I am not happy today.
She is not at home now.
They aren’t in the classroom now.
c. 一般疑问句式：提问主语现在或当前是什么、怎么样、在哪里吗。
AmIsAre + S + P + LA + TA?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S + am notisn’taren’t.
Is she a student? Yes, she , she isn’t.
Are they intelligent? Yes, they , they aren’t.
d. 选择疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + P1 or P2 + LA + TA?
Is your father a teacher or a doctor?
Are your friends from America or England?
e. 反义疑问句式：
S + amisare + P + LA + TA, isn’taren’t +S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S +am notisn’taren’t.
S + am notisn’taren’t + P + LA + TA, amisare +S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S +am notisn’taren’t.
You are a student, aren’t you? Yes, I , I am not.
I am a good boy, aren’t I? Yes, you , you are not.
f. 特殊疑问句式：提问主语现在或当前是什么、怎么样、在哪里吗
Wh-How + isaream+ S + P + LA + TA? (提问哪部分就去掉哪部分)
What is she?
How are they?
g. 祈使句句式：
Be + P + LA + TA, please.
Don’t be + P + LA + TA, please.
Be careful next time, please.
Don’t be late again, please.
h. 祈使句的反义疑问句式：
Be + P + LA + TA, willwon’t you?
Don’t be + P + LA + TA, will you?
Be more careful next time, willwon’t you?
Don’t be angry, will you?
③ There be 结构的句子：表示现在或当前什么地方有什么。
a. 陈述句肯定句式：
There isare + S + LA.
There is a book on the desk.
There are five people in my family.

英语语法
b. 陈述句否定句式：
There isare + not + any + S + LA.
= There isn’taren’t + any + S + LA.
There is not any water in the glass.
There aren’t any students in the classroom.
c. 反义疑问句式：
There isare + S + LA, isn’aren’t + there?
There isare + not + any + S + LA, isare + there?
= There isn’taren’t + any + S + LA, isare + there?
Yes, there + , there + isn’taren’t.
There are two tigers in the zoo, aren’t there?
Yes, there , there aren’t.
There isn’t any water in the cup, is there?
Yes, there , there isn’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
IsAre + there + S + LA?
Yes, there , there isn’taren’t.
Is there an apple tree in your yard? Yes, there is.
Are there any foreign students in your class? No, there aren’t.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh- How + isare + there + S + LA?
What is there on the desk?
How many people are there in your family?
2. 一般过去时：1. 表示主语过去经常做什么或习惯于做什么；
2. 表示过去某一时间发生某事；
3. 表示主语过去是什么、怎么样、在哪里；
4. 表示过去什么地方有什么。
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示在过去的某个时间主语做过什么或某事发生过。
a. 陈述句式的肯定句：
S + V-ed + O + LA + TA.
The hunter killed a wolf in the forest last night.
I went to the cinema last evening.
b. 陈述句否定句式：
S + didn’t + V + O + LA + TA.
I didn’t go to school yesterday.
We didn’t play football at school yesterday afternoon.
c. 一般疑问句式：
Did + S + V + O + LA + TA?
Yes, S + , S + didn’t.
Did you see him in the park yesterday afternoon?
Yes, I did.
8

考试必备
Did he tell you the news that we will have a three-day holiday next week?
No, he didn’t.
d. 选择疑问句式：
Did + S + V + O1 or O2 + LA + TA?
Did + S + V + O + A1 or A2 + LA + TA?
Did your friends play football or basketball yesterday afternoon?
Did you go to school by bus or by bike this morning?
e. 反义疑问句式：
S + V-ed + O + LA + TA, didn’t + S?
Yes, S + did. No, S +didn’t.
S + didn’t + V + O + LA + TA, did + S?
Yes, S + did. No, S +didn’t.
You played football yesterday afternoon, didn’t you?
Yes, we , we didn’t.
You didn’t go to school yesterday, did you?
Yes, I , I didn’t.
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + did + S + V + O + LA + TA? (提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Who + V-ed + O + LA + TA? （提问主语时）
Who played football yesterday?
What did you do last Sunday?
Where did you go last evening?
How did you go to Xi’an yesterday?
g. 否定疑问句：（难道）… 不 … 吗？
Wasn’tWeren’t + S + P + LA + TA?
Didn’t + S + V + O + LA + TA?
Why didn’t + S + V + O + LA + TA?
Why wasn’tweren’t + S + P + LA +TA?
Why wasn’tweren’t + there + S +LA + TA?
Wasn’t that your girlfriend on the bus just now?
Weren’t you busy yesterday?
Didn’t you know that Tom had stolen your watch?
Why didn’t you tell him the truth then?
Why wasn’t there a bridge over the river two years ago?
② 主系表结构的句子：表示主语过去是什么、怎么样、在哪里。
a. 陈述句肯定式：
S + waswere + P + LA + TA.
He was a teacher in this school two years ago.
She was very beautiful when she was in her twenties.
b. 陈述句否定式：
S + waswere + not + P + LA + TA.
= S + wasn’tweren’t + P + LA + TA.

英语语法
Tom wasn’t a policeman two years ago.
We weren’t at home last evening.
She wasn’t beautiful when she was young.
c. 一般疑问句式：
WasWere + S + P + LA + TA？
Yes, S + waswere. No, S + wasn’tweren’t.
Was she a worker two years ago?
Was he very handsome when he was young?
d. 选择疑问句式：
WasWere + S + P1 or P2 + LA + TA?
S + waswere + P1. S + waswere + P2.
Was your father a teacher or a doctor in the past?
Were your friends in America or England last year?
e. 反义疑问句式：
S + waswere + P + LA + TA, wasn’tweren’t + S?
Yes, S + waswere. No, S + wasn’tweren’t.
S + wasn’tweren’t + P + LA + TA, waswere +S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S +am notisn’taren’t.
You were in Xi’an yesterday, weren’t you?
Yes, I , I wasn’t.
He was a good boy in the past, wasn’t he?
Yes, he , he wasn’t.
f.特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + waswere + S + P + LA + TA? (提问哪部分就去掉哪部分)
What was he two years ago?
Where were you last month?
③ There be 结构的句式：表示过去什么地方有什么。
a. 陈述句肯定式：
There waswere + S + LA + TA.
There was a tree in my yard two years ago.
There were wolves in the forest in the past.
b. 陈述句否定句式：
There waswere + not + S + LA + TA.
= There wasn’tweren’t + S + LA + TA.
There wasn’t a school in this village ten years ago.
There weren’t any students in the classroom just now.
c. 一般疑问句式：
WasWere + there + S + LA + TA?
Yes, there , there wasn’tweren’t.
Was there a temple on the top of the mountain years ago?
Were there monkeys in the park in the past?
9

考试必备
d. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + waswere + there + S + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部分)
What was there in my yard two years ago?
Where were there monkeys in the past?
e. 反义疑问句式：
There waswere + S + LA, wasn’weren’t + there?
There waswere + not + any + S + LA, waswere + there?
= There wasn’tweren’t + any + S + LA, waswere + there?
Yes, there + , there + wasn’tweren’t.
There were two trees in your garden in the past, weren’t there?
Yes, there , there weren’t.
There wasn’t any money in your pocket, was there?
Yes, there , there wasn’t.
3. 一般将来时：
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示主语在将来的某个时间将要做什么。
A. 表示按照计划将做某事：
a. 陈述句肯定句式：
S + amisare + going to + V + O + LA + TA.
I am going to visit my teacher at her home tomorrow.
She is going to study in America next year.
b. 陈述句否定句式：
S + amisare + not + going to + V + O + LA + TA.
= S + am notisn’taren’t + going to + V + O + LA + TA.
We are not going to play football this afternoon.
She isn’t going to study in America next year.
c. 一般疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + going to + V + O + LA + TA?
Yes, S + , S + am notisn’taren’t.
Are you going to help us tomorrow?
Is she going to marry her boyfriend next month?
d. 选择疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + going to + V + O1 or O2 + LA + TA?
AmIsAre + S + going to + V + O + A1 or A2 + LA + TA?
Are you going to play football or basketball at school this afternoon?
Are you going to go to Beijing by plane or by train next month?
e. 反义疑问句式：
S + amisare + going to + V + O + LA + TA, isn’taren’t + S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S +am notisn’taren’t.
S + am notisn’taren’t + going to + V + O + LA + TA, amisare +S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S +am notisn’taren’t.

英语语法
You are going to buy a dictionary this afternoon, aren’ t you?
Yes, I , I am not.
Tom isn’t going to get married next month, is he?
Yes, he , he isn’t.
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + isaream + S + going to + V + O + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
What are you going to do next Sunday?
Who is going to marry her next month?
B. 表示临时决定做某事：
a. 陈述句肯定句式：
S + shallwill + V + O + LA + TA.
I shall call her now.
They will leave soon.
b. 陈述句否定句式：
S + shallwill not + V + O + LA + TA.
We shall not have a party this evening.
I will not go to the cinema with her this evening.
c. 一般疑问句式：
ShallWill + S + V + O + LA + TA?
Yes, S + , S + shan’t won’t.
Will they go to the park this afternoon?
Will you help carry the box?
d. 选择疑问句式：
ShallWill + S + V + O1 or O2 + LA + TA?
ShallWill + S + V + O + A1 or A2 + LA + TA?
Shall we play football or basketball at school this afternoon?
Will you go to Xi’an by bus or by car tomorrow morning?
e. 反义疑问句式：
S + shallwill + V + O + LA + TA, shan’twon’t +S?
Yes, S + shallwill. No, S + shan’twon’t.
S + shan’twon’t + V + O + LA + TA, shallwill +S?
Yes, S + shallwill. No, S + shan’twon’t.
We shall clean the classroom after class, shan’t we?
Yes, we , we shan’t.
Tom will go to Tibet tomorrow, won’t he?
Yes, he , she won’t.
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + shallwill + S + V + O + LA + TA? (提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Who will clean the classroom this afternoon?
When will you go to see him?
10

考试必备
C. 表示按照时间表或安排很快就要发生的事情：
a. 陈述句肯定式：
S + amisare to + V + O + LA + TA.
The plane is to take off soon.
The meeting is to start at 2:30.
b. 陈述句否定式：
S + amisare + not to + V + O + LA + TA.
The train is not to leave in five minutes.
The party is not to start soon.
c. 一般疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + to + V + O + LA + TA?
Is the film to begin soon?
Is the train to leave in five minutes?
d. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + amisare + S + to + V + O + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部分)
When is the train to leave?
Who is to see us off at the station?
D.表示即将很快发生的动作：
a. 陈述句式：
S + isaream about to + V + O + LA.
She is about to give a speech to us.
E. 具有方向性的动词可以用现在进行时表示将来时：
a. 陈述句式：
S + isaream + V-ing + O + LA + TA.
I am coming.
They are leaving.

② 主系表结构的句子：表示主语将来将会是什么、怎么样、在哪里。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + amisare going to be + P + LA + TA.
S + shallwill be + P + LA + TA.
I am going to be a doctor when I grow up.
My mother will be very busy tomorrow.
Tom will be in Xi’an tomorrow.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + amisare + not + going to be + P + LA + TA.
= S + am notisn’taren’t + going to be + P + LA + TA.
S + shallwill + not + be + P + LA + TA.
= S + shan’twon’t + be + P + LA + TA.

英语语法
My brother is not going to be a policeman after graduation.
I won’t be at home tomorrow morning.
c. 一般疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + going to be + P + LA + TA?
Yes, S + , S + am notisn’taren’t.
ShallWill + S + be + P + LA + TA?
Yes, S + , S + shan’t won’t.

Are you going to be a teacher in the future?
Will you be at home tomorrow evening?
d. 选择疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + going to be + P1 or P2 + LA + TA?
ShallWill + S + be + P1 or P2 + LA + TA?
Are you going to be a teacher or a businessman in the future?
Will you be in Xi’an or in Yanliang tomorrow?
e. 反义疑问句式：
S + amisare going to be + P + LA + TA, isn’taren’t + S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S + am notisn’taren’t.
S + shallwill be + P + LA + TA, shan’twon’t + S?
Yes, S + , S + shan’twon’t.
S + amisare + not + going to be + P + LA + TA, amisare + S?
= S + am notisn’taren’t + going to be + P + LA + TA, amisare + S?
Yes, S + amisare. No, S + am notisn’taren’t.
S + shallwill + not + be + P + LA + TA, shallwill + S?
= S + shan’twon’t + be + P + LA + TA, shallwill + S?
Yes, S + , S + shan’twon’t.
You are going to be a teacher in the future, aren’t you?
She is not going to be a nurse after graduation, is she?
Tom will be in Xi’an tomorrow, isn’t he?
You won’t be at home tomorrow evening, will you?
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + amisare + S + going to be + P + LA + TA?
Wh- How + shallwill + S + be + P + LA + TA?
（提问哪部分就去掉哪部分）
What are you going to be in the future?
Where is your mother going to be tomorrow?
When will you be at office tomorrow?
Why will you be in Xi’an tomorrow?
③ There be 结构的句式：表示将来什么地方将会有什么。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
There isare going to be + S + LA + TA.
There will be + S + LA + TA.
There is going to be a football match at our school tomorrow afternoon.
11

考试必备 英语语法
There will be a heavy rain this evening. S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + would not + V + O + LA + TA.
= S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + wouldn’t + V + O + LA + TA.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + waswere not going to + V + O + LA + TA.
There isare + not + going to be + S + LA + TA.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + wasn’tweren’t going to + V + O + LA + TA.
= There isn’taren’t + going to be + S + LA + TA.
He said (that) he would not help us the next day.
There will + not + be + S + LA + TA.
I had thought (that) he wouldn’t tell me the truth.
= There won’t + be + S + LA + TA.
c. 一般疑问句式：
There isn’t going to be a basketball match at our school tomorrow.
There won’t be any students in the classroom this evening. S1 + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + S2 + would + V + O + LA + TA.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + S2 + waswere going to + V + O + LA + TA.
c. 反义疑问句式：
She asked (me) whetherif I would take part in her wedding on that Sunday.
There isare going to be + S + LA + TA, isn’taren’t + there?
He wanted to know whetherif we would have a party that night.
Yes, there , there isn’taren’t.
d. 特殊疑问句式：
There will be + S + LA + TA, won’t there?
Yes, there , there won’t. S1 + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S2 + would + V + O + LA + TA.
There isare + not + going to be + S + LA + TA, isare + there? S1 + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S2 + waswere going to + V + O + LA + TA.
= There isn’taren’t + going to be + S + LA + TA, isare + there?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Yes, there , there isn’taren’t.
He asked (our headteacher) who would teach us English the next term.
There will + not + be + S + LA + TA, will + there?
I asked (her) how she would go to the USA.
= There won’t + be + S + LA + TA, will + there?
② 主系表结构的句子：表示从过某个时间来看将来某个时间主语将是什么、怎么样、
Yes, there , there won’t.
There is going to be a meeting this afternoon, isn’t there?
在哪里。通常作宾语从句或构成间接引语。
There will be a test tomorrow morning, won’t there?
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
There isn’t going to be an exciting movie on TV this evening, is there?
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + would + be + P + LA + TA.
There won’t be any students in the classroom this afternoon, will there?
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + waswere going to + be + P + LA + TA.
d. 一般疑问句式：
I never thought that I would be a teacher when I grew up.
IsAre + there going to be + S + LA + TA?
He told me that he would be in New York the next month.
Will + there be + S + LA + TA?
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
Are there going to be many people at your party this evening?
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + would not + be + P + LA + TA.
Will there be an American teacher at your school next term?
= S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + wouldn’t + be + P + LA + TA.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + waswere not going to + be + P + LA + TA.
Wh- How + isare + there isare going to be + S + LA + TA?
= S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + wasn’tweren’t going to + be + P + LA + TA.
Wh- How + will + there be + S + LA + TA? （提问哪部分就去掉哪部分）
He said that he would not be at home the next day.
I had thought that he wouldn’t be at home when I went to see him.
How many foreign teachers are there going to be in your school next year?
How many people will there be at your party this evening?
c. 一般疑问句式：
4. 过去将来时：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + S2 + would + be + P + LA + TA.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + S2 + waswere going to + be + P + LA + TA.
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示从过去某个时间来看将来某个时间主语将做某事。通常作
She asked (me) whether I would be a doctor after graduation.
宾语从句或构成间接引语。
He wanted to know whether we would be at home that evening.
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
d. 特殊疑问句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + would + V + O + LA + TA.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S2 + would + be + P + LA + TA.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + waswere going to + V + O + LA + TA. S1 + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S2 + waswere going to + be + P + LA + TA.
I never thought (that) you would bring me a gift for my birthday.
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
He told me (that) he would go to Beijing the next day.
He asked (me) who would be our English teacher the next term.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
I asked (her) where she would be that evening.

12

考试必备
通常作宾语从句或构成间接引语。
英语语法
Yes, they , they aren’t.
You are not learning in your study now, are you
Yes, I , I am not.
d. 一般疑问句式：
IsAreAm + S + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Is she playing the piano in her room now?
Are they learning English in the classroom now?

③ There be 结构的句子： 表示从过某个时间来看将来某个时间什么地方将会有什么。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + V-ed + (O) + (that) + there + waswere going to be + S + LA + TA.
S + V-ed + (O) + (that) + there + would + be + S + LA + TA.
He told me that there would be a football match on TV that evening.
I never thought that there would be so many people at her party.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + V-ed + (O) + (that) + there + waswere not going to be + S + LA + TA.
= S + V-ed + (O) + (that) + there + wasn’tweren’t going to be + S + LA + TA.
S + V-ed + (O) + (that) + there + would not + be + S + LA + TA.
= S + V-ed + (O) + (that) + there + wouldn’t + be + S + LA + TA.
He said (that) there would not be a movie on TV that evening.
I never thought that there wouldn’t be any food in my refrigerator.
c. 一般疑问句式：
S + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + there waswere going to be + S + LA + TA.
S + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + there + would + be + S + LA + TA.
She asked (me) whetherif there would be a football match at our school that
afternoon.
He wanted to know whetherif there would be a storm that evening.
d. 特殊疑问句式：
S + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + there waswere going to be + S + LA + TA.
S + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + there + would + be + S + LA + TA.
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
He asked (me) how many people there would be at our English party that evening.
I asked (her) how many American students there would be in her class the next term.
5. 现在进行时：表示此时此刻或当前一段时间主语正在做某事或某事正在发生。
a. 陈述句的肯定式：
S + amisare + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
They are playing basketball happily on the playground now.
My parents are watching TV in the living room now.
b. 陈述句的否定式：
S + amisare + not + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
= S + am notisn’taren’t + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
I am not watching TV at home now.
They are not learning English in the classroom now.
c. 反义疑问句式：
S + isamare + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, isn’taren’t + S?
S + am notisn’taren’t + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, amisare + S?
Yes, S + , S + am notisn’taren’t.
Your parents are watching TV in the living room, aren’t they?

e. 选择疑问句式：
IsAreAm + S + V-ing + O1 or + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
IsAreAm + S + V-ing + O1 or + V-ing + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
Are they playing football or basketball on the playground now?
Are you learning English or watching TV at home now?
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh- How + isaream + S + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Who is singing in the next room now?
Where are they playing football now?
g. 否定疑问句式：
Why + isn’taren’t + S + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Why aren’t you sleeping now?
Why isn’t she learning English in her study now?
6. 过去进行时：表示在过去的某个时间主语正在做某事或某事正在发生。
常用的时间状语有：
at this time yesterday morningafternoonevening;
at this time last weekmonthyear; at that time;
at nine o’clock yesterday morning; just now;
from June to August last year;
when + S + V-ed + O + LA +TA.
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + waswere + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
I was watching TV at this time last evening.
They were learning English when I went to see them.
b. 陈述句的否定式：
S + waswere + not + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
= S + wasn’tweren’t + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
I was not watching TV at home at nine o’clock last evening.
They were not learning English in the classroom when I went to see them.
c. 反义疑问句式：
S + waswere + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, wasn’tweren’t + S?
S + wasn’tweren’t + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, waswere + S?
Yes, S + , S + wasn’tweren’t.
Your mother was cooking supper when you got home, weren’t she?
13

考试必备 英语语法
Yes, she , she wasn’t.
You were not learning English in your study then, were you?
Yes, I , I wasn’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
WasWere + S + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Yes, S + waswere. No, S + wasn’tweren’t.
Was she playing the piano in her room at this time last evening?
Yes, she , she wasn’t.
Were they learning English in the classroom when you got there?
Yes, they , they weren’t.
e. 选择疑问句式：
WasWere + S + V-ing + O1 or + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
WasWere + S + V-ing + O1 or + V-ing + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
Were they playing football or basketball on the playground at nine o’clock this
morning?
They were playing football.
Were you learning English or watching TV at home when your mother got home?
I was learning English when my mother got home.
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + waswere + S + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Who was singing in the next room just now?
Where were they playing football at this time yesterday afternoon?
g. 否定疑问句式：
Why + wasn’tweren’t + S + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Why weren’t you sleeping at twelve o’clock last night?
Why wasn’t she learning English in her study at this time last evening?
7. 将来进行时：表示在将来的某个时间主语将会正在做某事或某事正在发生。
常用的时间状语有：
at this time tomorrow morningafternoonevening;
at this time next weekmonthyear;
at nine o’clock tomorrow morning;
from June to August next year;
when + S + V + O + LA +TA.
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + amisare going to be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
S + shallwill be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
I’m going to be learning English at this time tomorrow morning.
We will be having a party at this time tomorrow evening.
b. 陈述句的否定式：
S + amisare + not + going to be +V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
= S + am notisn’taren’t + going to be +V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.

14

S + shallwill not be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
= S + shan’twon’t be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA.
I’m not going to be learning English in America from June to August next year.
They will not be having a party in the classroom at seven o’clock tomorrow evening.
c. 反义疑问句式：
S + amisare going to be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, amisare + S?
= S+ am notisn’taren’t going to be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA,
amisare + S?
Yes, S + , S + am notisn’taren’t.
S + shallwill be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, shan’twon’t + S?
S + shallwill not be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, shallwill + S?
= S + shan’twon’t be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA, shallwill + S?
Yes, S + , S + shan’twon’t.
Your mother is going to be cooking supper when you get home, isn’t she?
Yes, she , she isn’t.
You will be learning in your study at nine o’clock this evening, won’t you?
Yes, I , I won’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + going to be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
ShallWill + S + be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Are you going to be learning English in America from June to August next year?
Will you be playing basketball at this time tomorrow morning?
e. 选择疑问句式：
AmIsAre + S + going to be + V-ing + O1 or + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
AmIsAre + S + going to be + V-ing + O1 or + V-ing + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
ShallWill + S + be + V-ing + O1 or + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
ShallWill + S + be + V-ing + O1 or + V-ing + O2 + MA + LA + TA?
Are you going to be learning English or Japanese at this time tomorrow morning?
Are you going to be learning English or watching TV at home this evening.
Will they be playing football or basketball on the playground at nine o’clock tomorrow
morning?
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + amisare + S + going to be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Wh-How + shallwill + S + be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
What are you going to be doing at this time tomorrow afternoon?
Where will you be waiting for me this evening?
g. 否定疑问句式：
Why + won’t + S + be + V-ing + O + MA + LA + TA?
Why won’t you be learning English at nine o’clock tomorrow morning?
Why won’t they be waiting for us at the school gate tomorrow morning?
8. 过去将来进行时： 表示从过去某个时间来看将来某个时间主语将会正在做某事或某
事正 在发生。通常作宾语从句或构成间接引语。

考试必备 英语语法
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + would be + V-ing + O + LA + TA.
He told me that he would be studying in England from May to July the next year.
The teacher said that we would be having a test tomorrow morning.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + would not be + V-ing + O + LA + TA.
= S1 + V-ed + (O) + (that) + S2 + wouldn’t be + V-ing + O + LA + TA.
He said (that) he would not be playing football at school that afternoon.
I had thought (that) he wouldn’t be attending the meeting that evening.
c. 一般疑问句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + S2 + would be + V-ing + O + LA + TA.
She asked (me) whetherif I would be having a party that Saturday evening.
He wanted to know whetherif we would be doing our homework at nine o’clock that
evening.
d. 特殊疑问句式：
S1 + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S2 + would be + V-ing + O + LA + TA.
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
He asked what we would be doing at that time the next day.
He wanted to know who would be giving us a speech the next morning.
9. 现在完成时:
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示到目前为止主语已经做过某事或某事已经发生。
常用的时间状语有：
since 2000; for + TP; so far; up to now;
since + TP + ago; (ever) since + S + V-ed + O + LA + TA;
in the past few years; (ever) since + S + waswere + P + LA + TA;
in the past three years;
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + havehas + (already) + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA.
I have already seen the movie.
Great changes have taken place in our school in the past few years.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + havehas + not + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
= S + haven’thasn’t + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
I have not read the book carefully yet.
She hasn’t finished her homework yet.
c. 反义疑问句式：
S + havehas + (already) + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA, haven’thasn’t + S?
S + havehas + not + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet, havehas + S?
= S + haven’thasn’t + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet, havehas + S?
Yes, S + , S + haven’thasn’t.
You have already told him the good news, haven’t you?

Yes, I , I haven’t.
Tom hasn’t learnt to drive a car yet, has he?
Yes, he , he hasn’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
HaveHas + S + P.P. + O + LA + TA + yet?
Yes, S + , S + haven’thasn’t.
Have you told him the news yet? Yes, I , I haven’t.
Has Mary finished her homework yet? Yes, she , she hasn’t.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + havehas + S + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
What have you done to my dog?
What have happened in our school in the past few years?
② 主系表结构的句子：表示到目前为止主语已经一直是什么、怎么样、在哪里多
长时间了。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + havehas been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
I have been a teacher in this school for five years.
He has been dead for two years.
My father has been out for two hours.
Tom has been in China for three years.
The film has been on for ten minutes.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + havehas not been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
= S + haven’thasn’t been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
I haven’t been a big brother for many years.
She hasn’t been well for three days.
My father hasn’t been home for two months.
I haven’t been there for a long time.
c. 反意疑问句式：
S + havehas been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, haven’thasn’t + S?
S + havehas not been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, havehas + S?
= S + haven’thasn’t been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, havehas + S?
Yes, S + , S + haven’thasn’t.
You have been a businessman for five years, haven’t you?
Yes, I , I haven’t.
She hasn’t been in China for a long time, has she?
Yes, she , she hasn’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
HaveHas + S + been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA?
15

考试必备
Yes, S + , S + haven’thasn’t.
Have you been in China for twenty years?
Yes, I , I haven’t.
Has your mother been a nurse for twenty- five years?
Yes, she , she hasn’t.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
英语语法
There have been 44 men who served as US President as of 2015.
How many moon landings have there been in human history?
There have been four moon landings in human history.
10. 过去完成时：
常用的时间状语有：
by the end of last yearmonthweek;
whenbefore + S + V-ed +O + LA + TA;
before 2000;
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示在过去某一时间之前主语已经做过某事或某事已经发生。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
S + had + (already) + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA.
I had already finished my homework when my mother got home.
Tom had learnt 3000 English words by the end of last month.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + had + nevernot + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
= S + hadn’t + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
I had never seen a foreigner before I left my hometown for university.
She hadn’t cooked dinner yet when her husband got home.
c. 反义疑问句式：
S + had + (already) + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA, hadn’t + S?
S + had + nevernot + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet, had + S?
= S + hadn’t + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet, had + S?
Yes, S + , S + hadn’t.
You had already seen him before the party, hadn’t you?
Yes, I , I hadn’t.
Tom hadn’t learnt Chinese before coming to China, had he?
Yes, he , he hadn’t.
c. 一般疑问句式：
Had + S + P.P. + O + LA + TA + yet?
Yes, S + , S + hadn’t.
Had the play started when you got to the cinema?
Had they left when you got to the party?
d. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + had + S + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
What had happened when you got there?
Who had already left when we got to the party?
② 主系表结构的句子：表示在过去的某个时间之前主语已经一直是什么、怎么样、在
哪里多长时间了。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
16

Wh-How havehas + S + been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA? (提问
哪部分就去掉哪部)
Who has been a worker in this factory for thirty years?
How many years has Tom been in China?
③ There be 结构的句子： 表示到目前为止什么地方已经有过什么或有什么多长时间
了。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
There havehas been + S + LA + TA.
There have been great changes in China since 1978.
There has been a bridge over the river since the Tang Dynasty.
There have been three accidents in one month.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
There havehas not been + S + LA + TA.
= There haven’thasn’t been + S + LA + TA.
There hasn’t been a single day when I don’t think of you since you left.
There hasn’t been much progress in your English in the past few years.
There haven’t been many books on that topic since 2000.
c. 反义疑问句式：
There havehas been + S + LA + TA, haven’thasn’t there?
There havehas not been + S + LA + TA, havehas there?
= There haven’thasn’t been + S + LA + TA, havehas there?
Yes, there , there haven’thasn’t.
There has been an accident, hasn't there?
Yes, there , there hasn’t.
There haven’t been any changes in this city, have there?
Yes, there , there haven’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
HaveHas there been + S + LA + TA?
Yes, there , there haven’thasn’t.
Has there been a woman president in American history?
Yes, there , there hasn’t.
Have there been a lot of changes in your city in the past few years?
Yes, there , there haven’t.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + havehas there been + S + LA + TA?
How many US Presidents have there been in history?

考试必备
S + had been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
I had been a teacher in this school for nine years when I resigned.
He had been ill for two years before he died.
He had been in the countyside for twenty years before he left for Shenzhen.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + had not been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
英语语法
There hadn’t been any books on that topic before 2000.
c. 反义疑问句式：
There had been + S + LA + TA, hadn’t there?
There had nevernot been + S + LA + TA, had there?
= There hadn’t been + S + LA + TA, had there?
Yes, there , there hadn’t.
There hadn’t been any changes in this city before 2000, had there?
Yes, there , there hadn’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
Had there been + S + LA + TA?
Yes, there , there hadn’t.
Had there been a black president in America before 2008?
No, there hadn’t. Obama is the first black person to have been elected US President
Had there been a lot of changes in your city before Jack Wood became Mayor?
Yes, there , there hadn’t.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How + had there been + S + LA + TA?
How many US Presidents had there been as of 2008?
There had been 43 men who served as US President as of 2008.
How many moon landings had there been before 2000?
There had been four moon landings before 2000.
11. 将来完成时：










常用的时间状语有：
by the end of this yearmonthweek;
by the time + S + V + O + LA + TA;
whenbefore + S + V +O + LA + TA;
by + 将来的一个时间;
= S + hadn’t been + P(n, adj, adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
He hadn’t been well for a long time before he was sent to hospital.
He hadn’t been in touch with us for twenty years before the reunion.
c. 反意疑问句式：
S + had been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, hadn’t + S?
S + had nevernot been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, had + S?
= S + hadn’t been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, had + S?
Yes, S + , S + haven’thasn’t.
She had been ill for five years before he died, hadn’t she?
Yes, she , she hadn’t.
d. 一般疑问句式：
Had + S + been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA?
Yes, S + , S + hadn’t.
Had they been in love for five years before they got married?
Yes, they , they hadn’t.
Had your father been an engineer for ten years before he set up his own factory?
Yes, he , she hadn’t.
e. 特殊疑问句式：
Wh-How had + S + been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA? (提问
哪部分就去掉哪部)
Who had been in the library before the murder happened?
How many years had you been a teacher before you resigned?
③ There be 结构的句子： 表示在过去某个时间之前，什么地方已经有过什么或有什
么多长时间了。
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
There had been + S + LA + TA.
There had been a great storm before the earthquake.
There had been an ancient bridge over the river before liberation.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
There had + nevernot been + S + LA + TA.
= There hadn’t been + S + LA + TA.
There had never been a single day when I didn’t study hard before I went to college.
There hadn’t been much progress in his English before he came to Cool & Quick
Education Center.

17
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示到将来某一时间之前主语已经做过某事或某事已经发生。
a. 陈述句肯定句式：
S + shallwill have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
S + amisare going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
She'll have visited ten countries by the time she gets back.
I'll have finished this project by Friday
Tom will have already left when we get there.
Mary will have left for America by the end of this year.
By next November, I will have received my promotion.
You are going to have perfected your English by the time you come back from the U.S.
By the time he gets home, she is going to have cleaned the entire house.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
S + will not + have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
= S + won’t + have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
S + amisare + not + going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.

考试必备 英语语法
= S + am notisn’taren’t going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
Mary won’t have finished her homework yet when we get home.
S + will not have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
I hope they won’t have left by the time we get there.
The film will not have begun when we get to the cinema.
= S + won’t have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
I am not going to have finished this test by 3 o'clock.
S + amisare not going to have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP +
c. 反义疑问句式：
TA.
S + will have + (already) + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA, won’t + S?
= S + am not isn’taren’t going to have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for
S + will not have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet, will + S?
+ TP + TA.
= S + won’t have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet, will + S?
I will not have been a worker for two years by the end of this year.
Yes, S + , S + won’t.
My father is not going to have been in Beijing for three weeks by the end of this week.
S + amisare +not + going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA, aren’tisn’t + S?
= S + am notisn’taren’t going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA, amis are + S?
c. 反意疑问句式：
You will have already finished your homework by three o’clock, won’t you?
S + will have been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, won’t + S?
Yes, I , I won’t.
S + will not have been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, will + S?
Tom won’t have arrived yet when we get there, will he?
= S + won’t have been + P + LA + for + TP + TA, will + S?
Yes, he , he won’t.
Yes, S + , S + won’t.
You are going to have visited more than one hundred countries by the end of this year,
You will have been a businessman for five years by the end of this year, won’t you?
aren’t you?
Yes, I , I won’t.
Yes, I , I am not.
She isn’t going to have been well for three months by the end of July, is she?
e. 一般疑问句式：
Yes, she , she isn’t.
Will + S + have + P.P. + O + LA + TA + yet?
d. 一般疑问句式：
Yes, S + , S + haven’thasn’t.
Will + S + have + been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA?
AmIsAre + S + going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA?
Yes, S + , S + won’t.
Yes, S + , S + am notisn’taren’t.
Will she have learned enough Chinese to communicate before she moves to Beijing?
AmIsAre + S + going to have + been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP +
Yes, she , she won’t.
TA?
Is Susan going to have had my book for a week by Monday?
Yes, S + , S + am notisn’taren’t.
Yes, she , she isn’t.
Will you have been in China for twenty years by then end of this year?
f. 特殊疑问句式：
Yes, I , I won’t.
Is your mother going to have been a nurse for twenty-five years by next month?
Wh-How + will + S + havehas + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA?
Yes, she , she isn’t.
Wh-How + amisare + S + going to have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA?
e. 特殊疑问句式：
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
What will you have done by the time your parents get home?
Wh-How + will + S + have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA?
How many countries are you going to have visited by the time you turn 50?
Wh-How + amisare + S + going to have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA +
② 主系表结构的句子：表示到将来的一个时刻为止，主语已经一直是什么、怎么样、
for + TP + TA? (提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
在哪里多长时间了。
Who will have been a worker in this factory for thirty years by the end of this year?
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
How many years is Tom going to have been in China by next December?
12. 过去将来完成时：
S + will have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
S + amisare + going to have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
I will have been a teacher in this school for five years by the end of this year.
He will have been dead for two month by June 8.
My mother is going to have been a nurse for twenty years by next May.

18
① 主谓宾结构的句子：表示从过某个时间来看，到将来某一时间之前主语已经做
过某事或某事已经发生：
a. 陈述句肯定句式：

考试必备 英语语法
S1 + V-ed + (O) + that + S2 + would have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
He told me that he would have left China by the end of that year.
F. 陈述句式：S + V + (O) + that + S + would have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
She told me that she would have been married for ten years by that June.
Eg. He told me that he would have left China by the end of that year.
b. 一般疑问句式：
She told me that she would have been married for ten years by that June.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + whetherif + S2 + would have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
G. 一般疑问句式：S + V + (O) + whether + S + would have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
He asked me whether I would have gone to America by the end of that year.
Eg. He asked me whether I would have gone to America by the end of that year.
I wanted to know whether he would have retired by that July.
I wanted to know whether he would have retired by that July.
c. 特殊疑问句式：
H.特殊疑问句式：S + V + (O) + wh-how + S + would have + P.P. + O + LA + TA. (提
S1 + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S2 + would have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
问哪部分就去掉哪部)
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. He asked me how long I would have been married by the end of that year?
He asked me how long I would have been married by the end of that year?
He asked me where I would have gone by that July.
He asked me where I would have gone by that July.

② 主系表结构的句子：表示从过去某个时间来看，到将来的一个时刻为止，主语已经
13. 现在完成进行 时：表示一个动作从过去的某个时间开始一直持续到现在，已经有多
一直是什么、怎么样、在哪里多长时 间了。
长时间了：
a. 陈述句的肯定句式：
a) 陈述句式：S + havehas been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + that + S2 + would have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词短语) + LA + for
Eg. I have been teaching English for ten years in this school.
+ TP + TA. She has been playing the piano for two hours.
S1 + V-ed + (O) + that + S2 + waswere + going to have been + P(n, adj,adv, 介词b) 一般疑问句式：HaveHas + S + been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA?
Eg. Have they been playing basketball for two hours?
短语) + LA + for + TP + TA.
Has she been learning English for ten years?
I will have been a teacher in this school for five years by the end of this year.
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + havehas + S + been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA?
He will have been dead for two month by June 8.
My mother is going to have been a nurse for twenty years by next May.
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)

Eg. Who has been learning English for ten years?

How long have they been playing basketball?
S + amisare going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.

She'll have visited ten countries by the time she gets back.
14. 过去完成进行时：表示一个动作从过去的某个时间开始一直持续到过去的另外一个
I'll have finished this project by Friday
Tom will have already left when we get there.
时间，已经有多长时间了：
Mary will have left for America by the end of this year.
a) 陈述句式：S + had been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA.
By next November, I will have received my promotion.
Eg. She had been playing the piano for two hours when her mother came home.
You are going to have perfected your English by the time you come back from the
I had been waiting for two hours when he came.
U.S.
By the time he gets home, she is going to have cleaned the entire house.
b) 一般疑问句式：Had + S + been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA?
b. 陈述句的否定句式：
Eg. Had you been waiting for a long time when he came?
Had they been playing basketball for two hours when one of them got hurt.
S + will not + have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
= S + won’t + have + P.P. + O + MA + LA + TA + yet.
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + had + S + been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA? (提
S + amisare + not + going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
问哪部分就去掉哪部)
= S + am notisn’taren’t going to have + P.P. + O + LA + TA.
Eg. Who had been learning English for ten years by the end of last year?
Mary won’t have finished her homework yet when we get home.
How long had you been playing the piano when your mother came home?
I hope they won’t have left by the time we get there.

The film will not have begun when we get to the cinema.
I am not going to have finished this test by 3 o'clock.

19

考试必备
15. 将来完成进行时：表示到将来的某个时间主语就已经一直做某事多长时间了：
英语语法
Doer 动作发出者。

1. 一般现在时：表示某人或某物经常或习惯于被怎么样：

词、O 宾语、P 表语、A 定语、LA 地点状语、TA时间状语、OA 其他状语、TP时间段、
a) 陈述句式：S + will have been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA.
Eg. I will have been learning English for ten years by the end of this year.
They will have been working in this school for five years by next June.
b) 一般疑问句式：Will + S + will have been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA + TA?
Eg. Will you have been playing football for two hours by 4 o’clock?
Will they have been living here for three years by the end of this year?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + wll + S + will have been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA +
TA? (提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. How long will you have been learning English by the end of this year?
Who will have been playing football for two hours by 4 o’clock?

16. 过去将来完成进行时：表示从过某个时间来看，到将来的某个时间主语就已经一直
做某事多长时间了：
a) 陈述句式：S + V + (O) + that + S + would have been + V-ing + O + for + TP + LA +
TA.
Eg. He told me that he would have been working in Xi’an for three years by the end of
that year.
He said that his father would have been teaching in the school for thirty years by
the end of that year.
b) 一般疑问句式：S + V + (O) + whether+ S + would have been + V-ing + O + for +
TP + LA + TA.
Eg. He asked me whether I would have been waiting for two hour by 10 o’clock.
She wanted to know whether I would have been learning English for ten years by
the end of that year.
c) 特殊疑问句：S + V + (O) + wh-how+ S + would have been + V-ing + O + for + TP
+ LA + TA.
Eg. He asked me how long I would have been learning English by the end of that year.
He wanted to know who would have been working in the factory for 30 years by
the end of that December.

十种被动语态：
被动语态是相对于主动语态而言的。主动语态是指动作的发出者作主语的句子; 被动语
态是指动作的承受着作主语的句子。即被动语态中的主语就是主动语态中的宾语。
什么时候使用被动语态？
1、当不知道动作的发出者时；
2、为了强调动作的承受者时。
字母符号的定义： S主语、V 动词原形、V-ing 现在分词、V-ed过去式、P.P. 过去分

20
a) 陈述句式：S + isaream + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. Football is played all over the world.
English is taught in all the middle schools in China.
b) 一般疑问句式：IsAreAm + S + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA？
Eg. Are computers used in your English teaching?
Is Tom often laughed at by his classmates?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + isaream + S + isaream + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. Who is often punished by your teacher?
What foreign language is taught in your school?

2. 一般过去时：表示在过去某个时间某人或某物被怎么样了：
a) 陈述句式：S + waswere + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. I was bitten by a dog in the park yesterday.
The Department Store was burnt down last night.
b) 一般疑问句式：WasWere + S + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Was Tom punished by his father last evening?
Were you caught picking flowers in the garden last week?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + waswere + S + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA? (提问哪部
分就去掉哪部)
Eg. Who was caught stealing books in the bookstore yesterday?
By whom was Tom punished yesterday?

3. 一般将来时：表示在将来某个时间某人或某物将被怎么样：
a) 陈述句式：S + will be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
S + amisare going to be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. A primary school will be set up in the small village next year.
Another bridge will be built over the river soon.
b) 一般疑问句式：Will + S + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Will a new library be built in our school next year?
Will she be sent abroad to study medicine by our school next term?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + will + S + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA? (提问哪部
分就去掉哪部)
Eg. Who will be sent abroad to study medicine by our school next term?

考试必备 英语语法
Where will a new library be built next year? Where was a new library being built at this time last year?

4. 一般过去将来时：表示从过某个时间来看，在将来某个时间某人或某物将被怎么样： 7. 现在完成时：表示到目前为止某人或某物已经被怎么样：
a) 陈述句式：S + V-ed + (O) + that + S + would + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. He told me that he would be sent abroad to study medicine by our school the next
year.
The headmaster told us that a new foreign teacher would be hired to teach in our
school the next term.
b) 一般疑问句式：S + V + (O) + whetherif + S + would + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA
+ TA.
Eg. He asked me whether Tom would be sent abroad by our school the next year.
Mary wanted to know whether the sports meet would be held the next month.
c) 特殊疑问句式：S + V-ed + (O) + wh-how + S + would + be + P.P. + by + Doer + LA
+ TA.
Eg. The students wanted to know who would be chosen to attend the meeting the next
week.
They asked me when the party would be held in honor of the new student.

5. 现在进行时：表示此时此刻或当前一段时间某人或某物正在被怎么样：
a) 陈述句式：S + isaream + being + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. A bridge is being built over the river by the construction firm now.
My bike is being repaired by the technician now.
b) 一般疑问句式：IsAreAm + S + being + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Is a new library being built in your school now?
Are they being punished by your head-teacher now?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + isaream + S + being + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. Who is being punished by your head-teacher now?
What is being built in your school?

6. 过去进行时：表示过去某一时刻或一段时间某人或某物正在被怎么样：
a) 陈述句式：S + waswere + being + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. The bridge was being built by the construction firm at this time last year.
My bike was being repaired at this time yesterday.
b) 一般疑问句式：WasWere + S + being + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Was your house being decorated at this time last year.
Was Tom being punished by his father when you went to see him yesterday?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + waswere + S + being + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. Who was being punished by our teacher at this time yesterday?

21
a) 陈述句式：S + havehas + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. The house has been sold by its owner.
His new novel has been published by a famous publisher.
b) 一般疑问句式：HaveHas + S + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Has your mother been told the news?
Have they been sent abroad to study physics by your school?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + havehas + S + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. Who have been sent abroad to study physics by our school?
Whose novel has been published by the famous publisher?

8. 过去完成时：表示在过去某一时间之前某人或某物已经被怎么样：
a) 陈述句式：S + had + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. The main stadium for the 2008 Beijing Olympics had been
completed by the end of 2007.
Many of his poems had been published before he graduated from university.
b) 一般疑问句式：Had + S + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Had the fire been put out before the firemen arrived?
Had they been told the news before it was officially announced?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + had + S + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA? (提问
哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. What had been done before the firemen arrived?
Who had been caught before the policeman arrived?

9. 将来完成时：表示到将来的某一时间之前某人或某物已经被怎么样：

a) 陈述句式：S + will have + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA.
Eg. Another school will have been set up in the village by the end of next year.
They will have been sent abroad to learn English by our school by next July.
b) 一般疑问句式：Will + S + have + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
Eg. Will a new library have been built in our school by the end of next year?
Will you have been sent to America by your parents by next June?
c) 特殊疑问句式：Wh-How + will + S + have + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA + TA?
(提问哪部分就去掉哪部)
Eg. What will have been built in our school by the end of next year?
How many students will have been sent to Britain by your school by the end of next
year?

考试必备 英语语法
Eg. The flower smells sweet.
The food has gone bad.
10. 过去将来完成时：表示从过某个时间来看，到将来的某一时间之前某人或某物已经
The cloth feels soft.
被怎么样：
She fell ill last evening.
The song sounds beautiful.
a) 陈述句式：S + V + (O) + that + S + would have + been + P.P. + by + Doer + LA
b) 表示主语的某种属性特征的动词，如：read, write, act, iron, cut, draw, drive, sell,
+ TA.
Eg. He told me that he would have been sent abroad by his parents by the end of that
wash, clean, wear, open, cook, lock, shut, dry, eat, drink等：
year.
Eg. The pen writes smoothly.
I was told that a new library would have been built in our school by the end of that
His book sells well.
year.
The machine runs well.
b) 一般疑问句式：S + V + (O) + whether + S + would have + been + P.P. + by +
The clothes washes easily.
Doer + LA + TA.
The door locks hard.
Eg. He asked me whether a new bridge would have been built over the river by the
c) 表示开始、结束、运动的动词，如：begin, finish, start, open, close, stop, end, shut,
end of the next year.
run, move等：
He wanted to know whether more students would have been sent abroad by our
school by the next August. Eg. Our English class finished early today.
The store opens at 8 o’clock in the morning.
c) 特殊疑问句式：S + V + (O) + wh-how + S + would have + been + P.P. + by +
The factory is closing down.
Doer + LA + TA.
The film starts soon.
Eg. Jack asked me what would have been built in our town by the end of that year.
d) Need, want, require, worth 常用主动语态表示被动语态的意思：
They wanted to know who would have been sent to study in that university by the
end of the next July.
句式结构：S + needwantrequire + V-ing

= S + needwantrequire + to be + P.P.
被动语态的特例：
S + isare + worth + V-ing.
Eg. The plants need watering.= The plants need to be watered.
1. 汉语有一类句子不出现主语，在英语中可用被动语态表示：
My shoes want washing. = My shoes want to be washed.
Eg. It is said that … 据说……
Your bike requires repairing. = Your bike requires to be repaired.
The film is worth seeing twice.
It is reported that … 据报道……
The novel is not worth reading.
It is supposed that … 据推测……
e) “介词in, on, under, beyond 等+名词” 构成介词短语表示被动意义，名词前通常无
It is hoped that … 希望……
冠词。如：under control, under repair, under discussion, under construction, beyond belief,
It is well known that … 众所周知……
beyond one’s reach, beyond our hope, for sale, in print, in sight, on show, on trial, out of
It is generally considered that … 普遍认为……
sight, out of fashion等：
Eg. My bike is under repair.
It is suggested that … 有人建议……
His new novel is on sale now.
Eg. It is said that he is famous in his own country.
Your suggestion is under discussion now.
It is reported that President Hu will visit the USA soon.
f) 有些形容词后的动词不定式有被动的含义。
It is hoped that she can be admitted into Peking University.
It is well known that Jack Chen is a famous action actor.
句型为：S + be + adj.(easyharddifficultheavylight comfortablefitdangerous +
It is suggested that we (should) have a party on this weekend.
to + V + O.
2. 主动形式表示被动的意义：
Eg. The work is hard to do.
English is interesting to learn.
a) “表示事物形态特征的系动词 look, sound, feel, smell, taste, appear, seem, go,
She is difficult to get along with.
prove, turn, stay, become, fall, get, grow, keep + 形容词名词” 构成系表结构：
g) 在too… to…和 enough to do结构中，主动句式表被动：

22

考试必备 英语语法
Eg. The rock is too heavy to pick.
The story is not interesting enough to publish.
The pig is heavy enough to sell.
h) 在 “S + havehas + n + to + V”句型中，主动句式表被动：
Eg. I have much homework to do today.
He has a big family to support.
3. get + P.P. 结构的用法：
a) 表示突然、偶然、意外发生的事：
Eg. He got hurt while playing football.
My wallet got stolen yesterday.
b) 表示反身行为而不是被动：
Eg. You have no time to get changed.
I’ve got to get dressed before they come.
c) 表示强调：
Eg. Did you get invited to her wedding?
Did she get fired for leaking the business secret of the company?

高考英语动词时态陷阱题总结归纳
1. “I _____ his telephone number.” “I have his number, but I ____ to bring my phone
book.”
A. forget, forget B. forgot, forgot
C. forget, forgot D. forgot, forget
2. — Oh, I ______ where he lives.
— Don’t you carry your address book？
— No, I ______ to bring it.
A. forget, forget B. forgot, forgot
C. forget, forgot D. forgot, forget
3. I had hoped to see her off at the station, but I _____ too busy.
A. was B. had been
C. would be D. would have been
4. We had hoped to catch the 10：20 train, but _____ it was gone.
A. found B. had found
C. would find D. would have found
5. We had hoped that you would be able to visit us, but you _____.
A. didn’t B. hadn’t
C. needn’t D. would not have
6. We had wanted to come to see him, but we ____ no time.
A. had B. had had
C. would have D. would have had
7. I had expected to come over to see you last night, but someone ______ and I
couldn’t get away.
A. called B. had called

C. would call D. would have called
8. The traffic accident wouldn’t have happened yesterday, but the driver _______
really careless.
A. was B. Is C. were D. had been
9. Dear me！ Just _____ at the time！ I _____ no idea it was so late.
A. look, have B. looking, had C. look, had D. looking, have
10. “Your phone number again？ I _____ quite catch it.” “It’s 4331577”
A. didn’t B. couldn’t C. don’t D. can’t
11. “Mr Smith isn’t coming tonight.” “ But he _____.”
A. promises B. Promised C. will promise D. had promised
12. “Hey, look where you are going！” “Oh, I’m terribly sorry. _____.”
A. I’m not noticing B. I wasn’t noticing
C. I haven’t noticed D. I don’t notice
13. “Oh it’s you！ I ________ you.” “I’ve had my hair cut.”
A. didn’t realize B. haven’t realized
C. didn’t recognize D. don’t recognized
14. “What’s her new telephone number？” “Oh, I _____.”
A. forget B. forgot
C. had forgotten D. am forgetting
15. “Since you’ve agreed to go, why aren’t you getting ready？” “But I ______ that
you would have me start at once.”
A. don’t realize B. didn’t realize C. hadn’t realized D. haven’t realized
16. “It’s twelve o’clock, I think I must be off now.” “Oh, really？ I ______ it at all.”
A. don’t realize B. haven’t realized
C. didn’t realize D. hadn’t realized
17. Mr Smith ______ a book about China last year but I don’t know whether he has
finished it.
A. has written B. wrote C. had written D. was writing
18. He has changed a lot. He _______ not what he _______.
A. is, is B. was, was C. is, was D. was, is
19. “What place is it？” “Haven’t you found out we _____ back where we ______？”
A. were, had been B. have been, are
C. are, were D. are, had been
20. He is very busy. I don’t know if he _____ or not tomorrow.
A. come B. comes C. will come D. is coming
21. I don’t know if she _____, but if she ____ I will let you know.
A. comes, comes B. will come, will come
C. comes, will come D. will come, comes
22. “When _____ he come？” “I don’t know, but when he _____, I’ll tell you.”
A. does, comes B. will, will come
C. does, will come D. will, comes
23

考试必备 英语语法
23. “When he _____ is not known yet.” “But when he ____, he will be warmly C. hadn’t finished D. wasn’t finishing
welcomed.”
16. —Didn’t the guard see him breaking into the bank？
A. comes, comes B. will come, will come
—No, he _______ in the other direction.
C. comes, will come D. will come, comes
A. was looking B. had looked C. looked D. is looking
24. The bridge, which _____ 1688, needs repairing.
17. How can you possibly miss the news？ It _______ on TV all day long.
A. is dated from B. was dated from
A. has been B. had been C. was D. will be
C. dates from D. dated from
18. “I thought you might have got drunk.” “Yes, I ______.”
25. “You’ve left the light on.” “Oh, so I have. _____ and turn it off.”
A. almost have B. almost had C. almost did D. might have
A. I’ll go B. I’ve gone C. I go D. I’m going

19. You ______ television. Why not do something more active？
1. Look at that little boy wandering about — perhaps he _____ his mother.
A. always watch B. are always watching
A. will lose B. is losing C. had lost D. has lost
C. have always watched D. have always been watching
2. It’s good that we _____ to the park because it’s started to rain.
20. “I took part in the TOEFL. It was really hard.” “ ______ a lot？”
A. don’t go B. hadn’t gone C. didn’t go D. wasn’t going
A. Have you studied B. Did you study
3. I _____ for five minutes； why don’t they come？
C. Had you studied D. Do you study
A. am calling B. called C. was calling D. have been calling
21. “What’s your opinion on the matter, please？” “Oh, sorry, I _______.”
4. You _____ your turn so you’ll have to wait.
A. wasn’t to listen B. haven’t listened
A. will miss B. have missed C. are missing D. had missed
C. wasn’t listening D. hadn’t listened
5. We _____ to move but are still considering where to go to.
A. are deciding B. decided C. have decided D. had decided
22. “Aha, you’re a chain smoker！” “Only at home. Nobody _______ that but you.”
6. I left my pen on the desk and now it’s gone； who _____ it？
A. discovered B. had discovered C. discovers D. is discovering
23. The telephone _______ three times in the last hour, and each time it ________ for
A. took B. has taken C. will take D. had taken
my father.
7. They won’t buy any new clothes because they _____ money to buy a new car.
A. had rang; was B. has rung; was
A. save B. were saving C. have saved D. are saving
C. rang; has been D. has been ringing; is
8. I _____ your last point — could you say it again？
24. The thief tried to break away from the policeman who ______ him, but failed.
A. didn’t quite catch B. don’t quite catch
A. has held B. had held C. was holding D. would hold
C. hadn’t quite catch D. can’t quite catch
25. When I arrived at the company, the manager ______, so we had only time for a
9. You’ll never guess who I met today — my old teacher！ We _____ for 20 years.
few words.
A. just went away B. had gone away
A. don’t meet B. haven’t met C. hadn’t met D. couldn’t meet
C. was just going away D. has just gone away
10. I feel sure I _____ her before somewhere.
A. was to meet B. have met C. had met D. would meet
26. “John took a photograph of you just now.” “Oh, really？ I ______.”
11. They haven’t arrived yet but we _____ them at any moment.
A. didn’t know B. wasn’t knowing
A. are expected B. have expected C. are expecting D. will expect
C. don’t know D. haven’t known
12. I think you must be mistaken about seeing him at the theatre； I’m sure he _____
27. “Mike is not coming to the football game this afternoon.” “It’s a shame！ He
abroad all week.
_______！”
A. is B. was C. has been D. had been
A. promises B. Promised C. will promise D. had promised
13. The students _______ busily when Miss Brown went to get a book she _______ in
28. Please call again. Jim _______ a bath just now.
the office.
A. has had B. was having C. is having D. has
A. had written, left B. were writing, has left
C. had written, had left D. were writing, had left
29. “Was Andrew there when you arrived？” “Yes, but he ______ home soon
14. I tried to phone her, but even as I _____ she was leaving the building.
afterwards.”
A. phoned B. would phone C. had phoned D. was phoning
A. had gone B. has gone C. is going D. went
15. “I suppose you _____ that report yet？” “I finished it yesterday, as a matter of fact.”
30. “Where is Mother.” “She is in the kitchen. She _______ the housework all
morning.”
A. didn’t finish B. haven’t finished

24

考试必备 英语语法
A. is doing B. was doing C. has done D. has been doing
17. “Look！ Everything here is under construction.” “What is the small building that
31. The books, ________ the dictionaries, must be put back where they ________.
______for？”
A. Included; were B. to include; are C. Including; were D. Including; are
A. is being building B. has been built

C. is built D. is being built
高考英语被动语态陷阱题总结归纳
18. Hundreds of jobs _______ if the factory closes.
1. “Do you like the material？” “Yes, it _____ very soft.”
A. lose B. will be lost C. are lost D. will lose
A. is feeling B. felt C. feels D. is felt 19. A red sky in the morning ______ to be a sign of bad weather.
2. Her forehead _____ hot. I’m afraid she is ill. A. says B. is saying C. has said D. is said
A. is feeling B. felt C. is felt D. feels 20. New medicines and instruments ______ every day to extend life.
3. The new school has been completed. It _____ very beautiful. A. develop B. are being developed
A. is looked B. looked C. has looked D. looks C. are developing D. have developed
4. The dish _____ nice, but the milk _____ sour.
A. is smelt, is smelt B. is smelt, smells
动词用法与辨析
C. smells, is smelt D. smells, smells
1. If you want to sell your product you must _____ it.
5. The story of his life _____ interesting.
A. advertise B. advertise for C. advertise on D. advertise to
A. is sounded B. is sounding C. has sounded D. sounds
2. No matter how much you’ve learned and how high a standard of education you
6. He was angry _____ your work. He said that he _____ at all.
have had, you must _______ the people heart and soul.
A. at, didn’t satisfy B. to, didn’t satisfy
A. serve B. serve for C. serve to D. serve on
C. at, wasn’t satisfied D. to, wasn’t satisfied
3. I _____ you yesterday, but you weren’t in.
7. The president _____ a cool reception when he visited London.
A. rang B. rang to C. rang with D. rang to
A. gave B. was given C. had given D. had been given
4. Neither of her parents wanted her to _____ her cousin.
8. A red sky in the morning _____ to be a sign of bad weather.
A. marry B. marry to C. marry with D. marry for
A. says B. is saying C. has said D. is said
5. How can I _____ you, Mr. Green？
9. If you go there alone after dark you might get _____.
A. contact B. contact with C. contact to D. contact for
A. attacked and robbed B. attacking and robbing
6. According to the rules, students must not ______ their books during examinations.
C. to attack and rob D. to be attacked and robbed
A. read B. watch C. notice D. look at
10. What I wanted to know was when and where the meeting ______.
7. “I love traveling. I hope to go with you this time.” “But does your mother _____ you
A. was holding B. had held
C. was to hold D. was to be held
to go？”
11. New medicines and instruments ______ every day to extend life.
A. let B. agree C. allow D. promise
A. develop B. are being developed
8. If they _______ to make heart-felt apologies soon we will have to bring an action
C. are developing D. have developed
against them.
12. I’ll come after the meeting if time ______.
A. disagreed B. refused C. agreed D. hoped
A. permits B. is permitting C. is permitted D. has permitted
9. They own two cars, not to _____ a motorbike.
13. The students _____ ￡50 a year to cover the cost of books and stationery.
A. speak B. say C. talk D. mention
A. give B. are given C. have given D. to give
10. “Do your parents agree to your doing that？” “Yes, of course. In fact, they always
14. With the development of science, more new technology _______ to the fields of IT.
______ me to try something new.”
A. has introduced B. is being introduced
A. hope B. suggest C. support D. encourage
C. is introduced D. was introduced
11. Nowadays everyone hopes to ______ good education so as to get a good job in
15. “How about the dishes, Dear？” “The beef didn’t taste very good. It ______ too
the future.
A. accept B. accept a C. receive D. receive a
long.”
12. Wearing dark glasses can _______ your eyes from the sun.
A. cooked B. had been cooked
A. care B. prevent C. defend D. protect
C. was cooked D. had cooked
13. Mr. Smith was in great need of money, so he ____ $$2 000 for his car.
16. He kept a little notebook, in which ______ the names and addresses of his friends.
A. paid B. took C. cost D. spent
A. wrote B. was writing C. was written D. were written

25

考试必备 英语语法
14. There are many kinds _____, but I don’t know which to buy. 11. He asked her to marry him and she _____ him.
A. to be chosen B. to choose from C. to choose D. for choosing A. answered B. received C. accepted D. agreed
12. My worst fears were _____ when I saw what the exam questions were.
15. “We have sent out two best players to the sports meet. What about you？” “Well,
A. done B. seen C. finished D. realized
not yet. We have few ______, I’d say.”
13. The plan looks good on paper, but will it _____？
A. chosen B. to choose C. to be chosen D. to choose from
16. “I’d like to buy an expensive camera.” “Well, we have several models ___.” A. work B. pass C. agree D. does
A. to pick up B. to pick C. to choose D. to choose from
14. What’s the matter with the radio？ Why isn’t it _____？
17. I _____ him not to go abroad, but he wouldn’t listen.
A. broadcasting B. working C. doing D. sounding
A. persuaded B. tried to persuade
15. High unemployment _____ the government billions of pounds in lost taxes.
C. have persuaded D. was persuaded
A. spends B. takes C. uses D. costs
18. When she came several days later, she found that all things still _______ where
16. It’s hard to rescue drowning people because they _____ so much.
she had _______ them.
A. sink B. swim C. jump D. struggle
A. lay; laid B. laid; laid C. lay; lain D. lying; lain
17. She went to the station to meet her husband, but _____ him in the crowd.
19. The hens _____ 50 eggs last week, but this week they aren’t _____.
A. passed B. recognized C. missed D. lost
A. lay, lying B. laid, laying C. lay, laying D. lied, lying
18. I missed what was happening because I wasn’t ______ very closely.
20. The girl ______ on the ground _____ to me that had _____ the purse on the desk.
A. noticing B. running C. watching D. glancing
A. lying, lay, laid B. lying, lied, laid C. lie, lied, lay D. lay, lied, lain
19. If you lend me a pound, it will _____ me having to go to the bank.
21. He _____ a visit to the factory and was warmly _____ by the workers there.
A. save B. share C. serve D. help
A. took, welcome B. took, welcomed
20. Don’t _______ your breath trying to persuade them; they’ll never listen.
C. paid, welcome D. paid, welcomed
A. use B. waste C. spend D. put
22. The boy said that the fish his mother cooked tasted ______.
21. He has spent little time on his lessons this term, so he _____ to fail the exam.
A. good B. well C. to be good D. to be well
A. expects B. hopes C. wishes D. requires

22. He will never ______ anything if he doesn’t work hard.
◆精编陷阱题训练◆
A. hope B. wish C. achieve D. succeed
1. We’re so busy that no one in the office can _____ for any other work.
A. spare B. be spared C. share D. be shared
四、名词性从句（主语、宾语、表语及同位语从句）
2. He regards that book _____ one of the worst that he’s _____ read.
从句的概念：包含有完整的主谓宾、主系表或there be 结构的句子在复合句中充当某一
A. to be, ever B. to be, never C. as, ever D. as, never
句子成分时被称作从句。充当什么成分就称作什么从句。
3. “Did you get a job？” “No, I ______, but it’s no use.”
A. expected B. tried to C. managed to D. planned
1. 主语从句：在复合句中充当主语的从句.
4. “Do you know that Jack ______ a postman for about six years？” “Yes, I see.”
a) 陈述句变为主语从句：在陈述句前加上无意义的引导词that：
A. has become B. has turned C. has changed D. has been
句式结构：That +
陈述句
+ V + O + LA + TA.
5. The thing that ______ is not whether you fail or not, but whether you try or not.
A. matters B. cares C. considers D. minds
Eg. She made a lot of mistakes in the exam. (陈述句)
6. I don’t want the green coat. It is red and black colours that ______ me very well.
That she made a lot of mistakes in the exam makes our teacher angry.
A. suit B. fit C. suits D. fits
Tom is from England. (陈述句)
7. “Will another fifty be enough？” “Just twenty will ______.”
That Tom is from England is known to us all.
A. work B. do C. suit D. fit
There was once a tree in the yard. (陈述句)
8. Goodbye, Mr Carter — my secretary will _____ you to the door.
That there was once a tree in the yard is true.
A. send B. lead C. drive D. show
9. This kind of cancer can be cured, provided it is ______ early.
b) 一般疑问句变为主语从句：将一般疑问句变为whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA
A. got B. gained C. seen D. caught
的形式。
10. We haven’t enough books for everyone; some of you will have to _____.
A. help B. enjoy C. share D. spare
句式结构：WhetherIf + S + V + O + LA + TA + V + O.

26

考试必备
Eg. Will we have a party tomorrow? (一般疑问句)
Whether we will have a party tomorrow has not been decided yet.
Is she satisfied with the result? (一般疑问句)
Whether she is satisfied with the result is not kwon yet.
Was there once a temple? (一般疑问句)
Whether there was once a temple is what I want to know.
c) 特殊疑问句变为主语从句：将特殊疑问句的句式变为陈述句式，
即：Wh-How + S + V + O + LA + TA.
句式结构：Wh-How + S + V + O + LA + TA + V + O.
Eg. When will she go to Beijing? (特殊疑问句)
When she will go to Beijing has not been decided yet.
What did he do yesterday? (特殊疑问句)
What he did yesterday made his teacher angry.
How can you learn English so well? (特殊疑问句)
How he can learn English so well interests us all.
用it 作形式主语的主语从句句式结构：
英语语法
It is predicted that our team will win the game.
5. It doesn’t matter how whether……:
Eg. It doesn’t matter how you will realize your dream.
It doesn’t matter whether he comes or not.
It doesn’t matter when you can finish the work.

2. 宾语从句：在复合句中充当宾语的从句：
a) 陈述句变为宾语从句：在陈述句前加上无意义的引导词that（that可省略）：
句式结构：S + V + that +
陈述句
.

Eg. He likes playing the piano. (陈述句)
I know that he plays the piano well.
Tom went to Beijing yesterday. (陈述句)
He says that Tom went to Beijing yesterday.
There are five foreign students in Class 5. (陈述句)
The teacher told us that there are five foreign students in Class 5.
b) 一般疑问句变为宾语从句：将一般疑问句变为whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA
的形式：
句式结构：S + V + whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. Are you happy today? (一般疑问句)
He asked whether you are happy today.
Will you have a party tomorrow evening? (一般疑问句)
Tom asked whether you will have a party tomorrow evening.
Did you go to the cinema last evening? (一般疑问句)
He wants to know whether you went to the cinema last evening.
Was there a temple in the village ten years ago?
I want to know whether there was a temple in the village ten years ago.
c) 特殊疑问句变为宾语从句：将特殊疑问句的句式变为陈述句式，即：Wh-How + S
+ V + O + LA + TA.
句式结构：S + V + Wh-How + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. What did he tell you just now? (特殊疑问句)
Could you tell me what he told you just now.
Where has she gone? (特殊疑问句)
Tom wants to know where she has gone.
When will you be back? (特殊疑问句)
She wants to know when you will be back.
3. 表语从句：在复合句中充当表语的从句：
a) 陈述句变为表语从句：在陈述句前加上无意义的引导词that：
27
1． It is +名词 + that 从句：常用名词有：regret, question, no wonder, pity, news,
honor, fact, duty,等：
Eg. It is a pity that she has made such a mistake.
It is no wonder she can speak so good English.
It is a fact that she has gone to America.
2. It + is + adj. + that 从句：常用的形容词有：important, possible, impossible,
necessary, anxious, natural, strange等：
Eg. It is natural that a mother (should) love her children.
It is important that we (should) master English.
It is necessary that the river (should) be protected from pollution.
3. It is + 不及物动词 + that 从句：
如：It seems that …… 似乎……
It happened that …… 碰巧……
Eg. It seems that they have know each other for a long time.
It happened that I had no money on me that day.
4. It is + P.P. + that 从句：
如：It is reported that ……
It is said that ……
It is predicted that ……
Eg. It is reported that Jay Chow will come to our school next Wednesday.
It is said that we will have an exam on Friday afternoon.

考试必备
句式结构：S + LV + that +
陈述句
.
Eg. He went to the cinema last evening. (陈述句)
What he told me is that he went to the cinema last evening.
There was a foreign student in his class last term. (陈述句)
What he said is that there was a foreign student in his class last term.
b) 一般疑问句变为表语从句：将一般疑问句变为whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA
的形式：
句式结构：S + LV + whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. Is she good at English? (一般疑问句)
What I want to know is whether she is good at English.
Will you go to the park this afternoon? (一般疑问句)
What she wants to know is whether you will go to the park this afternoon.
c) 特殊疑问句变为表语从句：将特殊疑问句的句式变为陈述句式，
即：Wh-How + S + V + O + LA + TA.
句式结构：S + LV + wh-how + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. How can I get to the railway station? (特殊疑问句)
What I want to know is how I can get to the railway station.
Where did you buy this dictionary? (特殊疑问句)
What she wants to know is where you bought this dictionary.
表语从句的基本句型：
英语语法
school.

5. 同位语从句：在复合句中充当同位语的从句：后跟同位语从句的常用名词有： < br>news、fact、opinion、question、suggestion、order、ide a 等。
a) 陈述句变为同位语从句：在陈述句前加上无意义的引导词that：
句式结构：

1. 同位语作主语时：N + that +
陈述句
+ V + O + LA+ TA.
Eg. The news that Jay Chou will come to our school is not true.
The fact that he has won the first prize surprised us all.
2. 同位语作宾语时：S + V + N + that +
陈述句
.
Eg. We have received the teacher’s order that we should clean
the classroom at once.
We accepted his suggestion that we should have a party on
the weekend.
b) 一般疑问句变为同位语从句：将一般疑问句变为whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA
的形式：
句式结构：
1. 同位语作主语时：N + whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. The question whether we can have a party on the weekend
has not been answered by our head-teacher yet.
2. 同位语作宾语时：S + V + N + whetherif + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. The teacher hasn’t answer our question whether we can
have a party on the weekend yet.
c) 特殊疑问句变为同位语从句：将特殊疑问句变为wh-how + S + V + O + LA + TA 的
形式：
句子结构：
1. 同位语作主语时：N + wh- how + S + V + O + LA + TA + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. The question how we can get to the railway station will be answered soon.
2. 同位语作宾语时：S + V + N + wh-how + S + V + O + LA+ TA.
Eg. I have no idea where he has gone.

高考英语名词性从句陷阱题总结归纳
1. She was so angry and spoke so fast that none of us understood _______ he said
meant.
A. that B. what C. that that D. what what
2. After _______ had happened he could not continue to work there.
A. which B. how C. what D. having
3. He pointed to ______ looked like a tomb and said, “Ghost.”
28
1. S + be + thatwh-how 引导的表语从句：
Eg. The problem is that we have not enough time to do
The village is where he was born..
The problem is how we can finish the task in so short a time.
2. S+ 连系动词(look, seem, spear, ……) + that 引导的表语从句：
Eg. It looks as if it is going to rain.
It appears to me that they have all known the result.
It seems that he will change his mind.
It looks as if he were her own father.
3. The reason + is was + that 引导的表语从句，意思是：“原因是……”：
Eg. He didn’t go to school yesterday. The reason was that he was ill.
4. ItThisThat + iswas + that 从句，意思是：“这那是因为……”：
Eg. He didn’t go to school yesterday. That was because he was ill.
5. ItThisThat + iswas + why 引导的表语从句，意思是：“这那是……的原因”：
= ThisThat + iswas + the reason + why引导的表语从句：
Eg. He fell ill. That was why he didn’t go to school yesterday.
He was knocked down by a car on his way to school. That was why he was late for

考试必备 英语语法
A. that B. what C. which D. as
4. “Is ______ you want to say？” asked the teacher.
A. this B. that C. all that D. that all
5. “When ______ leave for Japan？” “When ______ leave for Japan is kept secret.”
A. they will, will they B. will they, they will
C. they will, they will D. will they, will they
6. None knows if _______ that boy, but if _______ him, her parents will be
disappointed.
A. she will marry, she will marry B. she marries, she marries
C. she will marry, she marries D. she marries, she will marry
7. “Where _______ go to work？” “Where _______ go to work is not known.”
A. we shall, we shall B. shall we, shall we
C. shall we, we shall D. we shall, shall we
8. Someone is ringing the doorbell. Go and see ______.
A. who is he B. who he is C. who is it D. who it is
9. Don’t you know, my dear friend, ______ it is your money not you that she loves？
A. who B. which C. that D. what
10. Everyone knows, perhaps except you, _______ your girl-friend is a cheat.
A. who B. which C. that D. what
11. I think, though I could be mistaken, ______ she liked me.
A. who B. which C. that D. what
12. He told me the news, believe it or not, ______ he had earned $$1 000 in a single
day.
A. that B. which C. as D. because
◆精编陷阱题训练◆
1. They lost their way in the forest, and _______ made matters worse was that night
began to fall.
A. it B. which C. that D. what
2. Patience is a kind of quality — and that is ______ it takes to do anything well.
A. what B. which C. which D. how
3. It has come to my notice _______ some of you have missed classes.
A. what B. which C. that D. when
4. “What were you trying to prove to the police？” “___ I was last night.”
A. That B. When C. Where D. What
5. Country life gives him peace and quiet, which is ______ he can’t enjoy while living
in big cities.
A. that B. why C. where D. what
6. It is pretty well understood _______ controls the flow of carbon dioxide in and out
the atmosphere today.
A. that B. when C. what D. how
7. _______ she couldn’t understand was ______ fewer and fewer students showed
interest in her lessons.高.

A. What; why B. That; what C. What; because D. Why;
that
8. _______ we are doing has never been done before.
A. That B. What C. Which D. Whether
9. People have heard _______ the President has said; they are waiting to see
_______ he will do.
A. how, how B. what, what C. when, how D. that, what
10. When you answer questions in a job interview, please remember the golden rule：
Always give the monkey exactly _______ he wants.
A. what B. which C. when D. that
11. These wild flowers are so special I would do _______ I can to save them.
A. whatever B. that C. which D.
whichever
12. _______ she was invited to the ball made her very happy.
A. What B. That C. When D. Because
13. Eat ______ cake you like and leave the others for ______ comes in late.
A. any, who高.考. B. every, whoever
C. whichever, whoever高. D. either, whoever高.考.资
14. I had neither a raincoat nor an umbrella. _______ I got wet through.
A. It’s the reason B. That’s why
C. There’s why高.考. D. That’s because
15. ____ has helped to save the drowning girl is worth praising.
A. Who高.考.资. B. The one C. Anyone 高.考.资.源. D. Whoever
16. _______ medicine works in a human body is a question _______ not everyone
can understand fully.
A. How; that高.考. B. That; which C. That; which高.考.资.D. What; that


五、定语从句
什么是定语从句？在复合句中，修饰名词或代词的从句。
与定语从句有关的概念
1. 先行词：被定语从句所修饰的词；
2. 引导词：连接先行词与定语从句的词，分为关系代词和关系副词。
关系代词：that、which、who、whom、whose、as；
关系副词：when、where、why。
3. 限制性定语从句：定语从句与先行词关 系紧密、不可或缺，如果去掉会影响整句
意思的表达，先行词与定语从句间不可用逗号分开。
4. 非限制性定语从句：定语从句与先行词关系不十分紧密，只对现行做些附加的说
29

考试必备
关系代词的用法详述：
1. that 引导的定语从句：【人、物、主、宾】
英语语法
Eg. The foreigner who visited our school yesterday is from Canada. (人、主)
→ The foreigner is from Canada.
The foreigner visited our school yesterday.
The English teacher who taught me for three years has gone to America.
→ The English teacher has gone to America.
The English teacher taught me for three years.
4. whom引导的定语从句：【人、宾】
whom引导的定语从句先行词只能是人，只可以作从句中动词的宾语。
Eg. The woman whom my father is talking to is our head-teacher.（人、宾）
→ The woman is our head-teacher.
My father is talking to the woman.
In the dark street, there was no one to whom she could turn for help. (人、宾)
→ In the dark street, there was no one.
She could turn to no one for help.
5. whose引导的定语从句：【人、物、所属】
whose引导的定语从句先行词既 可以是人也可以是物，先行词和whose之后
明，即使去掉也不影响整句意思的表达。先行词与定语从 句常用逗号隔开，不能用that引导。
that 引导的定语从句先行词既可以是人也可以是物，既 可以作从句中动词的主语，也可
以作从句中动词的宾语。(注：所有的包含定语从句的复合句都是由两个 或两个以上的简单句
构成的)
先行词作从句中动词的宾语时，that可省略。
Eg. The man that is standing over there is my English teacher. （人、主）
→ The man is my English teacher.
The man is standing there.
The dog that bit me yesterday belongs to Tom. (物、主)
→ The dog belongs to Tom.
The dog bit me yesterday.
The girl (that) you met in the park yesterday is my sister. (人、宾)
→ The girl is my sister.
You met the girl in the park yesterday.
The book (that) I bought yesterday is very interesting. (物、宾)
→ The book is very interesting.
I bought the book yesterday.
2. which引导的定语从句：【物、主、宾】
which引导的定语从句先行词只能 是物，但既可以作从句中动词的主语，也可
以作从句中动词的宾语。
先行词作从句中动词的宾语时，which可省略。
Eg. We planted some trees which do not need much water. (物、主)
→ We planted some trees.
The trees do not need much water.
The fish (which) she gave me just now is not fresh. (物、宾)
→ The fish is not fresh.
She gave me the fish just now.
which 引导非限制性定语从句时，可以代替整个主句或主句的一部分内容：
Eg. They bought a new house, which is located at the seaside.
The film, Hero, which was directed by Zhang Yimou, was a success.
He was sentenced to death last week, which surprised us all.
I failed in the exam again, which made our teacher very angry.
3. who引导的定语从句：【人、主】
who引导的定语从句先行词只能是人，只可以作从句中动词的主语。

30
的词构成所属关系。
Eg. The woman whose purse was stolen by a thief is my teacher. (人、所属)
→ The woman is my teacher.
The woman’s purse was stolen by a thief.
The room whose window faces south is mine. (物、所属)
→ The room is mine.
The room’s window faces south.
whose = of whichwhom + the + 物人 = the + 物人 + of whichwhom
Eg. Lily bought a skirt whose color is white.
= Lily bought a skirt of which the color is white..
= Lily bought a skirt the color of which is white.
The woman whose daughter went abroad last year is my teacher.
= The woman of whom the daughter went abroad last year is my teacher.
= The woman, the daughter of whom went abroad last year, is my teacher.
6. as引导的定语从句：【人、物、宾、非限制性定语从句】
as 可以直接引导非限制性定语从句，也可构成固定短语如：the same … as…及
such … as…。
Eg. As we all know, English is widely used all over the world. (非限制性定语从句,
“正如……”)
As I have told you, he is a liar. (非限制性定语从句, “正如……”)
Such people as he knew helped him a lot.
I’ll buy the same book as you bought yesterday.

考试必备
as 引导非限制性定语从句的用法： 当谓语动词是be announced
expectedknownimaginedpointed outsadreportedshown等被动形式（表示“正
英语语法
当先行词是reason时，如果它作从句中动词的宾语，引导词用关系代词which
或that或不 填；如果它作从句中动词的原因状语，引导词则用关系副词why或for which。
Eg. This is the reason whichthat
不填
he explained to me. (先行词reason作宾语)
?This is the reason.
He explained the reason to me. (reason作explained的宾语)
This is the reason whyfor which he did not go to school yesterday. (reason作原因
状语)
? This is the reason.
He did not go to school yesterday for the reason.

定语从句的注意事项：
1. 关于介词提前:
当先行词作从句中动 词的宾语，并且从句中动词是带有介词的动词短语时，该介词可以
提前到关系代词whose，whom , which之前。
Eg. This is the knife thatwhich he killed the man with.
= This is the knife with which he killed the man.
There was no one that he could turn to for help.
= There was no one to whom he could turn for help.

2. 引导词只能用that的情况：
a) 先行词时不定代词或被某些形容词修饰时，此类词有：something, everything,
anything, nothing, all, much, any, few, little, every, no 等。
Eg. Do you have anything that you want to tell me?
He gave all the money that he has to his granddaughter.
There is no one that he believes in this world.
He has few friends that will help him.
b) 先行词前有最高级，序数词或the very, the only, the last, the same 等修饰时：
Eg. The only person that I trust is Tom.
The Titanic is the best film that I have ever seen.
Marry is the first American that I have made friends with.
This is the very book that I am after.
She is the last girl that I want to marry.
c) 先行词既有人又有物时：
Eg. The film star and his films that you have just talked about is really famous.
Could you tell us something about the people and places that you visited in
Britain?
d) 先行词是who或which时：
Eg. Who is the boy that is playing football over there?
Which is the book that belongs to you?
31
如……”）或usually happen, be often the case等表示主语的习惯性或司空见惯之意时，常
用as:
Eg. As was announced, our winter vacation will start on January 27
th
.
As was expected, our team won the match.
As usually happen, Tom is late again.
As is often the case, Mike was fined for speeding again.

关系副词的用法详述：
1. when = 介词+ which
当先行词是表示时间的词时，如果它作从句中动 词的宾语，引导词用关系代词which或
that或不填；如果它作从句中动词的时间状语，引导词则 用关系副词when或相应的介词
+which。
Eg. I will never forget the day whichthat
不填
we spent together in Beijing. (先行词
作宾语)
?I will never forget the day.
we spent the day together in Beijing. (day作spent的宾语)
I will never forget the day whenon which I joined the League. (先行词作时间状语)
?I will never forget the day.
I joined the League on the day. (the day 作joined the League的时间状语)
2. where = 介词+ which
当先行词是表示地点的词时，如果它作从句中动词的宾语，引导词用关系代词which或
th at或不填；如果它作从句中动词的地点状语，引导词则用关系副词where或相应的介词
+whic h。
Eg. This is the factory thatwhich
不填
we visited last month.
(先行词作宾语)
?This is the factory.
We visited the factory last month. (factory 作visited的宾语)
This is the factory wherein which my father worked for thirty years. (先行词作地点
状语)
?This is the factory.
My father worked in the factory for thirty years. (factory 作worked的地点状语)
3. why = for which

考试必备 英语语法
e) 在there be 句型中：
Eg. There is a dictionary on the desk that is very interesting.
There is a boy that wants to see you in the hall.
f) 介词提前时，不能用that：
Eg. This is the classroom in which we are studying.
This is the knife with which I cut the watermelon with.
g) 在非限制定语从句中，不能使用that：
Eg. The house, which was bought last month, is very nice.
He failed in the exam again, which made his mother very angry.

高考英语定语从句陷阱题总结归纳
1. The factory was built in a secret place, around ______ high mountains.
A. which was B. it was
C. which were D. them were
2. Yesterday we visited a modern hospital, around _______ some fruit shops.
A. which is B. it is C. which are D. them are
3. The murder happened in an old building, beside ______ the city police station.
A. which are B. it is C. which is D. them are
4. Next month we’ll move to a new building, next to _______ a nice restaurant where
we can have Chinese food.
A. which are B. it is C. which is D. them are
5. A man with a bleeding hand hurried in and asked, “Is there a hospital around
______ I can get some medicine for my wounded hand？”
A. that B. which C. where D. what
6. _____ is known to everybody, the moon travels round the earth once every month.
A. It B. As C. That D. What
7. _______ is known to everybody that the moon travels round the earth once every
month.
A. It B. As C. That D. What
8. ______ is mentioned above, the number of the students in senior school is
increasing.
A. Which B. As C. That D. It
9. ______ is mentioned above that the number of the students in senior school is
increasing.
A. Which B. As C. That D. It
10. David is such a good boy _______ all the teachers like.
A. that B. who C. as D. whom
11. David is such a good boy _______ all the teachers like him.
A. that B. who C. as D. whom
12. It was not such a good dinner _______ she had promised us.
A. like B. that C. which D. as
13. The buses, most of _______ were already full, were surrounded by an angry
crowd.
A. that B. it C. them D. which

14. His house, for _______ he paid $$10, 000, is now worth $$50, 000.
A. that B. it C. them D. which
15. Ashdown forest, through _______ we’ll be driving, isn’t a forest any longer.
A. that B. it C. them D. which
16. This I did at nine o’clock, after _______ I sat reading the paper.
A. that B. it C. them D. which
17. George, with _______ I played tennis on Sundays, was a warm-hearted person.
A. that B. him C. them D. whom
18. Her sons, both of ______ work abroad, will come back home this summer.
A. that B. who C. them D. whom
19. I met the fruit-pickers, several of _______ were still university students.
A. that B. who C. them D. whom
20. He had thousands of students, many of ______ gained great success in their own
field.
A. whom B. them C. which D. who
21. He asked a lot of questions, none of ______ was easy to answer.
A. which B. them C. what D. that
22. He asked a lot of questions, and none of ______ was easy to answer.
A. them B. which C. what D. that
23. He told me that he had two girl-friends, neither of _______ knew anything about
the other.
A. whom B. them C. which D. who
24. He told me that he had two girl- friends, and neither of _______ knew anything
about the other.
A. them B. whom C. which D. who
25. He had a lot of friends, only a few of ______ invited to his wedding.
A. whom B. them C. which D. who
26. They put forward a lot of plans at the meeting, none of _______ carried out in their
work.
A. which B. them C. what D. that
27. They put forward a lot of plans at the meeting, none of _______ were carried out in
their work.
A. which B. them C. what D. that
28. They put forward a lot of plans at the meeting, but none of _______ were carried
out in their work.
A. which B. them C. what D. that
29. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park, _______ parents
seated together joking.
A. their B. whose C. which D. that
30. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park, _______ parents were
seated together joking.
A. their B. whose C. which D. that
31. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park, and _______ parents
were seated together joking.
A. their B. whose C. which D. that
32. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park, _______ parents
sitting together joking.
32

考试必备 英语语法
A. their B. whose C. which D. that 50. It’s said that he’s looking for a new job, one ______ he can get more money to
33. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park, _______ parents sat support his family.
together joking. A. when B. where C. that D. which
A. their B. whose C. which D. that 51. We are living in an age ______ many things are done on computer.
34. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park, _______ parents were A. which B. that C. whose D. when
sitting together joking. 52. The little time we have together we’ll try _____ wisely.
A. their B. whose C. which D. that A. spending it B. to spend it
35. If the man is only interested in your looks, _____ just shows how shallow he is. C. to spend D. spending that
A. as B. which C. what D. that 53. The old building, behind _______ was a famous church, was _______ we used to
36. If you promise to go with us, _____ will be OK. work.
A. as B. which C. and it D. that A. that, the place B. it, the place
C. which, where D. what, where
37. If you want a double room, _____ will cost another ￡15.
54. We will be shown around the city： schools, museums, and some other places,
A. as B. which C. what D. that
38. Whether you go or not, _______ is quite all right with me. _______ other visitors seldom go.
A. that B. which C. and it D. so A. what B. which C. where D. when
39. When I say two hours, _____ includes time for eating. 55. The modern history of Italy dates from 1860, ______ the country became united.
A. as B. which C. what D. that A. when B. if C. since D. until
40. She says that she’ll never forget the time ________ she’s spent working as a 56. All of the flowers now raised here have developed from those _____ in the forest.
secretary in our company. A. once they grew B. they grew once
A. which B. when C. how D. where C. that once grew D. once grew
41. She says that she’ll never forget the time ________ she works as a secretary in 57. You could see the runners very well from ______ we stood.
our company. A. which B. where C. that D. when
A. which B. when C. how D. where 58. Recently I bought an ancient Chinese vase, _______ was very reasonable.
42. Our company will move to a tall building _______ we bought last month. A. which price B. the price of which
A. which B. when C. how D. where C. its price D. the price of whose
43. Our company will move to a tall building _______ has just been completed.
59. What have you got _____ will help a cold？
A. which B. when C. how D. where
A. what B. that C. it D. who
44. Our company will move to a tall building _______ we worked two years ago.
60. He was very angry and I can still remember the way _____ he spoke to me.
A. where B. when C. that D. which
A. how B. that C. what D. which
45. All of the flowers now raised here have developed from those _______ in the
61. Do you know the man from ________ house the pictures were stolen？
forest.
A. which B. that C. what D. whose
A. once they grew B. they grew once
62. I can think of many cases _______ students obviously knew a lot of English words
C. they once grew D. once grew
and expressions but couldn’t write a good essay.
46. In the office I never seem to have time until after 5：30 pm, _____ many people
A. why B. which C. as D. where
have gone home.
63. Is this all that you need？ If you married me, I’d give you everything you _____.
A. that B. which
A. want B. wanted C. had wanted D. are wanting
C. whose time D. by which time
64. I met the teacher in the street yesterday ________ taught me English three years
47. Is this the reason _______ at the meeting for his carelessness in his work？
ago.
A. he explained B. what he explained
A. which B. when C. where D. who
C. how he explained D. why he explained
65. He’s got himself into a dangerous situation _____ he is likely to lose control over
48. Luckily, we’d brought a road map without ______ we would have lost our way.
the plane.
A. it B. that C. this D. which
A. where B. which C. while D. why
49. When he was working there he caught a serious illness from _____ efforts he still
66. He made another wonderful discovery, ______ of great importance to science.
suffers.
A. which I think is B. which I think it is
A. which B. that C. whose D. what
C. which I think it D. I think is

33

考试必备 英语语法
67. Dorothy was always speaking highly of her role in the play, ____, of course, made
minute, the day, the year, the first time, the second time, by the time, each time,
the others unhappy.
every time, next time, any time 等：
A. who B. which C. this D. what
68. Their problem today is somewhat similar to _____ they faced many years ago.
Eg. The moment he came out of the car, I recognized who he was.
A. that B. which C. that which D. it
I fell in love with her the first time I met her.
69. I saw some trees the leaves of _____ were black with disease.
A. that B. which C. it D. what
He is smiling every time I see him.
70. The famous basketballer, _______ tried to make a comeback, attracted a lot of
The thief ran away the minute he saw the policeman.
attention.
A. where B. when C. which D. who
e) 表示“一……就”的短语：如：as soon as, immediately, directly, instantly, no
71. When they went into the shop and asked to look at the engagement rings, the girl
sooner … than, hardlyscarcelybarely … when 等：
brought out a cheaper one, _______ she had arranged with James.
A. the which was what B. what was that
Eg. I will call you as soon as I get there.
C. which was what D. that was that
The baby burst out crying immediately he saw his mother.

I had no sooner entered my room than the telephone rang.
六、状语从句
什么是状语从句？在复合句中，充当状语的从句。
状语从句共有九类，分别是：
1. 时间状语从句； 2. 地点状语从句； 3. 原因状语从句；
4. 比较状语从句； 5. 目的状语从句； 6. 结果状语从句；
7. 条件状语从句； 8. 方式状语从句； 9. 让步状语从句。
分类学习：
1. 时间状语从句：
a) 时间状语从句可以放在句首、句中和句尾。
b) when, while, as 可引导时间按状语从句，意为“当……的时候”：
Eg. When he was young, he couldn’t go to school.
I was having dinner when he came to see me last evening.
He hurt himself while riding his bicycle.
As I was walking down the street, I came across an old friend.
c) untiltill是指某一持续性动作持续到某一时间点，终止性动作要用否定式：Not until
放在句首时，主句要部分倒装。
Eg. He lived in the village untiltill he was 20 years old.
I will wait untiltill you come back.
Not until he was forty, did my uncle got married.
Not until eleven o’clock did we finish our homework.
d) 表示时间的名词短语也可引导时间状语从句：如：the time, the moment, the

34
注意：当no sooner, hardly, scarcely, barely置于句首时，它们之后要跟过去完成时的
倒装句， than和when之后要跟一般过去式：表示“刚刚……就”。
Eg. No sooner had I entered my room than the telephone rang.
Hardly had I got off the bus when I started to move.
f) 在时间状语从句中，用一般现在时代替一般将来时，一般过去时代替过去将来时：
Eg. I will let you know as soon as he comes.

时间状语从句的特例：
a) It will be + 一段时间 + before + S + V + O…:表示“多久之后……才……”：
Eg. It will not be long before the term comes to an end.
It will be a long time before we meet again.
b) It is + 一段时间 + since + S + V-ed + O …: 表示自动作完成时起就……：
It was + 一段时间 + since + S + had + P.P. + O … :
Eg. It is two years since I smoked last time. 我已经不抽烟两年了。
It was a long time since I had had so much fun. 我已经很久没玩的那么愉快了。
c) It iswas not until … that … : 表示强调句，意为“直到……才……”：

Eg. It was not until he was twenty-eight that Qi Baishi began to study painting.
It was not until the boss came that they began to work.

2. 地点状语从句：

考试必备 英语语法
The older you grow, the better you will understand it.
e) 倍数的表达方法主要有三种方式：
1) A + be + 基数词（3以上）+ times + as + adj. + as B.
Eg. This rope is three times as long as that one.
This building is four times as tall as that one.
2) A + be + 基数词（3以上）+ times + as + adj.- er + than B.
Eg. My new house is three times larger than the old one.
This river is four times longer than that one.
3) A + be + 基数词（3以上）+ times + the
sizelengthwidthheightdepthetc. + of B.
Eg. The red box is three times the size of the blue one.
This rope is three times the length of that one.
This well is three times the depth of that one.

5. 目的状语从句：

a) 地点状语从句可以放在句首、句中和句尾， 引导词有：where, wherever 等，相当
于：”toinfrom the place(s) where…” 或 ”intofrom any place where…”结构：
Eg. Xiaohong is welcomed wherever he goes.
The book is where you left it.
b) 一般只要在地点状语从句中的引导词where前加上toinfrom the place，便可变
为定于从句：
Eg. Leave the book in the place where it was.
She is welcomed in any place where she goes.

3. 原因状语从句：
a) 原因状语从句可以放在句首、句中和句尾， 其引导词有：because, as, since, now
that, for the reason, in that, seeing that 等：
Eg. Since she has come, you needn’t go.
He didn’t go to school because he caught a cold.
Now that everyone is here, let’s get started.
Seeing that he is ill, we will do the work for him.

4. 比较状语从句：
a) 同级比较：常用 “as…as…”，第二个as 之后即为比较状语从句：
Eg. He is as tall as you are.
I can run as fast as you do.
He speaks English as well as a native speaker.
b) 不同级比较结构：常用 “not soas…as…”：
Eg. Music is not soas difficult as English (is).
He speaks English not so well as his brother (does).
c) 差级或高级比较：常用”…than…” than之后即为比较状语从句：
Eg. I can run faster than you (can).
She plays the piano better than any other student in her class (does).
d) 表示递进关系的状语从句：常用结构：“the + 比较级…… the + 比较级”：
Eg. We must grow trees; the more, the better.
The more you practice, the better your oral English will be.

35
a) 目的状语从句可以放在句首、句中和句尾， 其引导词有：in order that, so that, for
fear (that), in case 等：
Eg. He got up early so that he could catch the first bus to school.
In order that he can learn English well, he spent all his spare time on English.
You’d better bring your umbrella in case it rains.
b) 在目的状语从句中常含有助动词may, might, will, would, shall, can, could等。如
上例。
c) 在主句的主语和从句的主语一致时，目的状语从句可以和表目的不定式或介词短语互
换。
Eg. In order that he can win the game, he practices hard every day.
= In order to win the game, he practices hard every day.
= To win the game, he practices hard every day.

6. 结果状语从句：
a) 结果状语从句一般置于句尾， 其引导词有：that, so, so that, such that,
so …that …, such … that…等：

考试必备
Eg. He made such a big noise that everybody was surprised.
He is so tall that he can touch the ceiling.
b)
1)
so …that …的用法：
so + . + that …
英语语法
I will not go to his birthday party unless he invites me.
You will fall in love with her once you see her in person.

8. 方式状语从句：
a) 结果状语从句一般置于句尾， 其引导词有：as, as if, as though：
Eg. When in Rome, do as the Romans do.
You should do it as you have been instructed.
b) As if as thought 的用法：
1) 当它们引导的方式状语从句所表示的是事实或可能性很大时，用陈述语气：
Eg. It looks as if it is going to rain soon.
so + adj. + aan + 可数名词单数 + that … It seems as though the shop will be closed down soon.
2) 当它们引导的方式状语从句所表示的不是事实而是主观的想象或夸大性的比喻时，用
虚拟语气：
Eg. He speaks English as though he were an Englishman.
They chatted as if they had known each other for a long time.

9. 让步状语从句：
a) 让步状语从句可以置于句首或句尾，有时也可置于句中，其引导词有：though,


Eg. She is so beautiful that all the boys in her class like her.
He runs so fast that no one can catch up with him.
2) so + many few much little + 相应形式的名词 + that …
Eg. He has read so many books that he is very knowledgeable.
She has so much money that she can buy anything that she
wants.
3)
Eg. She is so clever a girl that she is good at every subject.
The Titanic
was so moving a film that I saw it six times.
c) such …that …的用法：
1)
2)
3)
such + aan + adj. + 可数名词单数 + that …
such + adj. + 可数名词复数 + that …
such + adj. +不可数名词 + that …
Eg. Mike is such an honest worker that we all believe in him.
It is such fine whether that we all want to have a picnic in the park.
It is no surprising that such little worms eat so little grain.

7. 条件状语从句：
a) 条件状语从句可置于句首或句尾，有事还可置于主语与谓语之间，其引导词有：if,
unless, asso long as, once, in case, on condition that, supposing (that), given (that)
等：
Eg. Take an umbrella with you in case it rains.
I’ll help you with your English on condition that you help me with my math.
Given that he is a newcomer, he has done it pretty well.
You will make great progress in English soon as long as you work hard at it.
b) 在条件状语从句中，用一般现在时代替一般将来时，一般过去时代替过去将来时：
Eg. You will fall behind others unless you study hard.

36
although, even though, as, whether … or not …, whether or not, whatever, whichever,
whoever, whomever, whosever, whenever, wherever, however 等：
Eg. I will try many more times, even though I may fail again and again.
I will not go to the cinema with you even if you pay for my ticket.
Wherever you go, I will fllow you.
b) though, although引导让步状语从句时，主句可以用still, yet，但不可用but：
Eg. Though it was raining hard, they still worked hard in the fields.
Though he is not so rich yet he often help those who are in trouble.
Although he love her, he dare not tell her.
c) asthough引导让步状语从句时，从句中的表语、状语或谓语中的实义动词需提
前 至句首。如果表语是带冠词的名词，冠词需省略：
句式结构：

考试必备 英语语法
A. that B. when C. which D. where
6. The famous scientist grew up _______ he was born and in 1930 he came to
AlthoughThough + S +
?
be?表语
?
?
V?状语
?
情态?V?
?
?
?
, S + V + O + …
?
?
?
?
?
, S + V + O + …
?
?
Shanghai.
A. when
A. where
A. when
questions.
A. at which
A. where
A. where
A. that
A. if
A. that
shoulder.
A. as B. until


C. when D. while
D. directly
D. before
16. I was about to go out ______ the telephone rang.
A. when
A. when
help.
A. when
37
B. suddenly C. until D. before
B. suddenly
B. suddenly
C. as soon as
C. until
17. We were swimming in the lake _______ the storm started.
18. She was walking down the road _______ she heard someone shouting for









B. at where
B. when
B. when
B. at which
B. because
B. where






C. the place where
C. in which
C. in which
C. when
C. when
C. which










D. where
D. that
D. that
D. where
D. where
D. when
10. You should let your children play ______ you can see them.
11. Now he works in the factory ______ his father used to work.
12. The visitor asked to have his picture taken _______ stood the famous tower.
13. They kept trying _____ they must have known it was hopeless.
14. Why do you want a new job ______ you’ve got such a good one already?
15. He was about to tell me the secret ______ someone patted him on the



B. whenever
B. while
B. where


C. where
C. in which
C. then



D. wherever


D. that
D. which
7. She found her calculator _______ she lost it.
8. You should make it a rule to leave things _______ you can find them again.
9. When you read the book, you’d better make a mark _____ you have any
=
?
表语
?
?
状语
?
V
?
?
?
?
+ asthough + S +
?
?
?
be< br>?
?
V
?
情态
?
Eg. Though he is a hero, he has some shortcomings.
= Hero as he is, he has some shortcomngs.
Though you may try hard, you will not succeed.
= Hard as you may try, you will not succeed.
Though you may wait, he will not see you.
= Wait as you may, he will not see you.
Though the noble are proud, they are afraid to see me.
= Proud as the noble are, they are afraid to see me.
Though he is a child, he can tell right from wrong.
= Child as he is, he can tell right from wrong.

高考英语状语从句陷阱题总结归纳
1. “May I go and play with Dick this afternoon, Mum?” “No, you can’t go
out _______ your work is being done.”
A. before
some stamps?”
A. As


B. While
B. As
B. As


C. Because


D. If
3. _______ you are at home alone, please don’t leave the door open.
A. While
A. While
theatre.

C. Before
C. After
D. How
D. How
4. _______ you are alone with her, tell her that you like her.
5. After the war, a new school building was put up ______ there had once been a
B. until C. as D. the moment
2. “I’m going to the post office.” “_______ you’re there, can you get me

考试必备
A. when
A. until


B. since
B. when


C. after
C. before


D. before
英语语法
32. _______ your diet, it is easy to reduce.
A. Watching









B. To be watching
D. To have watched
D. if having


C. If you watch
A. Having
A. Paying

19. The fire went on for quite some time _______ it was brought under control.
20. He made a mistake, but then he corrected the situation _______ it got worse.
D. as
21. Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but they hung up ________
I could answer the phone.
A. as B. since C. until D. before
22. She is getting better by degrees, but it will be some time _____ she is
completely well.
A. that
spoke.
A. after
happen.
A. in case
A. In case
A. in case
A. in case
A. in case
A. so that
B. so that
B. So that
B. so that
B. so that
B. so that
C. in order that
C. In order that
C. in order that
C. in order that
C. in order that
C. in case






D. when
D. When
D. when
D. when
D. when
D. when
D. To check

25. ________ I forget, please remind me about it.
26. Take your umbrella just ________ it rains.
27. Be quiet _______ you should wake the baby.
28. Take a hat with you in case the sun is very hot.
29. I’ll keep his address _____ I need it.
B. in order that
30. _______ your composition carefully, some spelling mistakes can be avoided.
A. Having checked
A. Being
B. Check






C. If you check
B. Having been
D. To have been
38
31. ________ more careful, the work might have been done better.
C. If you had been

B. before C. since D. when
24. Mother asked me to take more money _______ something unexpected should
B. since C. when D. before
23. They sat down opposite each other, but it was some moments ______ they
33. _______ a pair of compasses, it is easy to describe a circle.
B. To have had C. If you have


34. _______ for something, a receipt is given to you.
B. Having paid
D. To be paying
C. When you see D. Having seen
C. When you have paid
A. Seeing
35. _______ the sun rising slowly in the east, the scene is a perfect dream.
B. To be seeing
36. “Shall Mary come and play computer games?” “No, _______ she has
finished her homework.”
A. when
noisy.”
A. when B. if C. unless D. as soon as
38. “Will he agree to come to join us in the work?” “No, _______ we promise
him more money.”
A. when B. unless C. unless D. as soon as
39. “When did he leave the classroom?” “He left _______ you turned back to
write on the blackboard.”
A. the time B. the moment C. until D. since
40. “Did you remember to give Mary the money you owed her?” “Yes, I gave
it to her ________ I saw her.”
A. while
A. while
A. while

◆ 精编陷阱题训练◆



B. the moment
B. the instant
B. the minute
C. suddenly
C. suddenly
C. suddenly






D. until
D. before
D. since
doorkeeper gave the alarm _______ he saw the smoke.
42. I raised the alarm _______ I saw the smoke.
B. since C. unless D. as soon as
37. “Would you mind my sitting here with you?” “No, ______ you aren’t too

考试必备
1. Don’t be afraid of asking for help _______ it is needed.
A. unless B. since C. although D. when
2. A good storyteller must be able to hold his listeners’ curiosity ________ he
reaches the end of the story.
A. when B. unless C. after

D. until
3. _______ I know the money is safe, I shall not worry about it.
A. Even though B. Unless
A. even if
C. As long as D. while
D. unless
4. You will succeed in the end ____ you give up halfway.
B. as though C. as long as
英语语法
15. He is better than _______ I last visited him.
A. when B. that C. how




D. which
D. While
16. _______ the punishment was unjust, he accepted it without complaint.
A. So long as
A. While
danger.
A. As long as
A. Whatever
B. As far as
B. Whenever
C. Just as
C. However


D. Even if
D. Wherever
19. _______ rich one may be there is always something one wants.
20. John shut everybody out of the kitchen _______ he could prepare his grand
surprise for the party.
D. Whoever
D. for them
D. Whoever
D. then
D. Whenever
D. As soon as
A. which
A. if


B. when
B. even


C. so that
C. though


D. as if
D. even when
21. Mr Zhang is mild in character. He never shouts ____ he is very angry.

B. Even though
B. As
C. Since

17. ________ the grandparents love the children, they are strict with them.
C. Since D. Because
18. _______ I can see, there is only one possible way to keep away from the

5. “Was his father very strict with him when he was at school?” “Yes. He had
never praised him _______ he became one of the top students in his grade.”
A. after







B. unless C. until D. when
6. _____ I suggest, he always disagrees.
A. However
A. where
A. Wherever
A. while
A. Whatever
A. Now that
A. first time
B. Whatever
B. in which
B. However


C. Whichever
C. at
7. You should put on the notices ______ all the people may see them.
8. _____ she goes, there are crowds of people waiting to see her.
C. Whichever

9. Mary clapped her hand over her mouth _______ she realized what she had said.
B. as soon as C. suddenly
B. What
B. After










10. ________ her faults, she’s Arnold’s mother. Don’t be so rude to her.
C. Whichever
C. Although
11. ____ you’re got a chance, you might as well make full use of it.
12. I thought she was the very girl that I should marry _______ I met her.
B. for the first time
D. by the first time
D. when
D. when
39
C. the first time
A. in case
A. that


22. “How long do you suppose it is _______ he left for Japan?” “No more than
half a month.”
A. when
state.
A. that B. which C. as D. what
七、直接引语和间接引语
直接引语：一字不改的将别人的话加以引用或转述；需放在双引号内。
间接引语：用自己的话将别人的话加以转述。不用双引号，多用宾语从句的形式表示。

直接引语变间接引语的方法：
1.
2.
人称变化：“一主、二宾、三不变”，即：第一人称按照主句中的主语变化，第二
时态变化：
人称按照主句中的宾语变化，第三人称不需要变化；
1). 当引述的动词为现在时形式时，间接引语中的动词形式不变。
B. before C. after D. since
23. In some countries, _______ are called “public schools” are not owned by the
13. Don’t play by the river _______ you fall in and drown!
B. so that

C. in order that

14. Why do you want a new job ____ you’ve got such a good one already?
B. where C. which

考试必备






2). 当引述的动词为过去时形式时，间接引语中的动词形式作如下变化：



现在进行时 → 过去进行时
一般过去时 → 过去完成时
一般将来时 → 过去将来时





现在完成时 → 过去完成时
过去完成时 → 不变
一般现在是 → 一般过去时
英语语法
→ Tom said that he had lost his bike.
Mike said, “I have seen this film twice in this cinema.”
→ Mike told me that he had seen that film twice in that cinema.

2. 一般疑问句式：从句要用陈述句的句式，用if或whether引导，主句谓语动词
多用ask:
句式结构：S + asked (sb.) + ifwhether + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. Tom asked me, “Do you like English?”
→ Tom asked me ifwhether I liked English.
Mike asked Mary, ”Have you seen the film?”
→ Mike asked Mary ifwhether she had seen the film.
3. 特殊疑问句式：从句要用陈述句的句式并且用特殊疑问词引导：
句式结构：S + asked (sb.) + wh-how + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. Tom asked me,” where did you buy the dictionary?”
将来进行时 → 过去将来进行时
现在完成进行时 → 过去将来完成进行时
注意：如果转述的内容表示客观真理，或者有某一绝对具体的过去时间作状语，
this → that

these → those
today → that day
则间接引语中的时态不变。
3. 指示代词：
4. 时间状语：













now → then
tomorrow → the next (following) day
next week → the next week
yesterday → the day before


the day before yesterday → two days ago
ago → before
here → there
bring → take
must → had to must
shall → should may → might
last night → the night before → Tom asked me where I bought the dictionary.
“How much did you pay for the book?, she asked Tom.
→ She asked Tom how much he paid for the book.
4. 祈使句式：
句式结构：S + askedtoldorderedwarned advised + O + to + V + O.
Eg. “Open the door, please.” Tom said to me.
→ Tom asked me to open the door.
“Clean the classroom now.” our teacher said.
→ our teacher ordered us to clean the classroom.
“Don’t swim in the lake.” Mother told me.
→ Mother warned me not to swim in the lake.
特例：以Let、WhatHow about 开头的祈使句表示劝告或建议时用“suggest that
从句”或“suggest doing”转述：
Eg. “Let’s go to the cinema, “ Tom said.
→ Tom suggested that we (should) go to the cinema.
Tom suggested going to the cinema.
“WhatHow about having a picnic on the weekend?” Mike asked.
→ Mike suggested that we (should) have a picnic on the weekend.
40
the day after tomorrow → two days later
5. 地点状语：
6. 方向性动词：come → go
7. 情态动词变化: can → could


will → would
各类句式结构直接引语变间接引语的方法：
1. 陈述句式：用that引导，从句的人称、时态、指示代词、时间状语、地点状语
做相应的变化：
句式结构：S + said (told me) that + S + V + O + LA + TA.
Eg. Mary said, ”I’m afraid that I can’t pass this exam in Physics.”
→ Mary said that she was afraid that she couldn’t pass that exam
in
Physics.
Tom said, “I lost my bike.”

考试必备 英语语法


八、情态动词

一、情态动词的基本用法：
1. cancould
1) 表示能力;
Eg. He can speak three languages.
She could swim at the age of 5.
2) 表示客观的可能性；
Eg. Accidents can happen to any drunken driver.
Swimming in the lake can be dangerous.
3) 表示请求和允许；
Eg. Can I have a look at your new watch?
Yes, of course you can.
4) 表示请求时，口语中常用could代替can使语气婉转，但回答时仍用can；
Eg. Could you please help me learn English?
Yes, I can.
5) 表示惊讶、怀疑、不相信的态度（主要用于否定句、疑问句）；
Eg. How can you believe such a liar as him?
That can’t be true.
2. maymaight
1) 表示允许、许可；（否定回答用mustn’t, 表示“禁止”）
Eg. May I listen to music while doing my homework?
No, you mustn’t.
2) 表示请求许可时，might比may的语气更委婉些；
Eg. MayMight I trouble you to pass me the book?
3) 表示可能性的推测，might比may的语气显得更加不肯定；
Eg. Tom may go to the cinema with us this evening.
Tom might go to the cinema with us this evening.
4) May 用于祈使句表示祝愿；

41
Eg. May you have a happy life.
May you succeed.
3. willwould
1) 表示意志或意愿；（will 表示现在，would表示过去）
Eg. I will tell you about it.
He told me that he would help me.
2) 用于第二人称时表示请求、建议等，用would 比will 委婉、客气；
Eg. Will you get me a dictionary?
Would you come this way, please?
3) 表示习惯性的动作，意为“惯于”；（will 表示现在，would表示过去）
Eg. That old woman is strange. She will sit for hours without saying anything.
When he was young. He would practice playing the piano for hours a day.
4) 表示预料或猜想;
Eg. It will be ten when we gat there.
5) 表示规律性的“注定会”用will；
Eg. People will die without water.
She wiill be twelve next year.
4. need
1) 表示“需要、必要”，作情态动词，仅用于否定句和疑问句。
Eg. Need I tell him everything?
Yes, you , you needn’t.
2) 用作实义动词时，其变化与一般动词相同：
Eg. I need to go to Nanjing to attend a meeting this weekend.
5. dare
1) 表示“敢、敢于”；作情态动词，主要用于疑问句、否定句和条件句中。
Eg. Dare he tell them what he knows?
They dare not go out alone at night.
2) 用于实义动词，在否定句中可接带to 或不带to 的不定式。
Eg. He dares not (to) tell the manager the truth.
6. ought to
1) 表示“应该”同should；

考试必备
Eg. Human ought to stop polluting the nature.
You ought not to get involved in the matter.
2)
7.
1)
表示推测，意为“想必”；
must
Eg. They ought to get to Beijing by now.
英语语法
2) 用于表示推测，译作“可能，准是”；
Eg. It should be Mary who has taken all the books.
They should get there now.
3)
4)
用于第一人称时可表示说话人的一种谦逊、客气、委婉的语气；
“WhyHow + should…”结构表示说话人对某事不能理解，感到意外、惊
Eg. You are mistaken, I should say..
讶等，意为“竟会”；
Eg. Why should you be so early today?
How should you be so angry at his words?

二、常见的用法比较：
1. can’t 意为“不可能，一定不”，而may not 意为“可能不、或许不”，前者语气更
强；
Eg. They can’t be at home now. 他们现在不可能在家。
他们现在可能不在家。 They may not at home now.

表示“必须、应该”语气比should, ought to 强烈，否定形式mustn’t 表
示“不准、不应该、禁止”等；
Eg. Drivers mustn’t drive after drinking.
You must be careful when crossing the street.
2) 在回答带有must的问句时，否定回答常用needn’t或don’t have to，
表示“不必”而不用“mustn’t”；
Eg. Must I finish my homework before eight?
No, you needn’t. No, you don’t have to.
3) 表示很有把握的推测，意为“一定、准时”，用于肯定句；
Eg. You must be ill. I can see it from your face.
They must be playing basketball now.
4) 表示偏执、固执；
Eg. Why must you always interrupt me?
Must you play the piano now?
8.
1)
shall
用于第一、第三人称疑问句中，表示说话人征求对方的意见和向对方请示？
2. must表示说话认得主观看法，而have to表示客观的需要；
mustn’t 表示“决不能”，而 don’t have to意为“不必”；
Eg. You must be sleepy now.
I have to leave now, it’s too late.
May I have a look at your watch？ No, you mustn’t.
You don’t have to get up so early on weekends.
3. would 可表示过去反复发生的动作或某种倾向，后面要接表示动作的动词，不能接
表示认识或状态的词。used to 表示过去习惯的动作或状态，强调现在已经不存在。
Eg. He would often come to see me when I was living in the country.
He used to swim in the river when he was young.
There used to be a lake.
4. have to 和 have got to 都可表示“不得不”，注意以下几点：
1) 表示习惯性动作，尤其句中含有always, often, sometimes 等时，用have to:
Eg. I always have to get up early on Sundays.
She sometimes has to work 12 hours a day.
2)
42
have to 之前可加情态动词和助动词，但have got to 前不能：

Eg. Shall we have a party this weekend?
Shall Tom go to the cinema with us this evening?
2)
胁；
Eg. You shall get an teacher to help your son.
Your pictures shall be ready this afternoon.
9.
1)
should
用于表示劝告或建议，作“应该”讲；
用于第二、第三人称陈述句中，表示说话人给对方的命令、警告、允许或威
Eg. I think we should work hard at English.
You should tell him the truth.

考试必备
Eg. I shall have to help him as much as I can.
3) have to 的否定式为don’t have to, 而 have got to 的否定式为
haven’t got to; 前者的疑问句式借助于do, 后者直接将have提前：
Eg. You don't have to tell him all about it.
Do you have to go to the cinema with her this evening?
I’m glad I haven’t got to work today.
Have you got to finish your homework today?
5. can 与 be able to 的用法比较：
1) be able to 有更多的时态：
Eg. Will you be able to help us tomorrow?
I’m sorry that I haven't been able to answer your letter in time.
2)
英语语法
Eg. You shouldn’t have told him my secret.
You shouldn’t have given your son so much pocket money.
3) S + ought to have + P.P. + O. 本来应该做某事但实际上没有做
Eg. Tom ought to have reviewed his lessons last night.
You ought to have spent more time in learning English when you were
young.
4) S + ought not to have + P.P. + O. 本来不应该做某事但实际上做了
Eg. You ought not to have driven so carelessly.
They ought not to have been allowed to swim in the lake.
5) S + must have + P.P. + O. 过去一定发生过某事主语过去一
定做过某事
Eg. It must have rained last night for the ground is wet.
He must have lived in America for many years for he speaks perfect
English.
6) S + can’tcouldn’t have + P.P. + O. 过去不可能发生过某事 主语
过去不可能做过某事

在过去时态中，could 仅指具备某种能力，但实施的结果不明确， 而waswere
able to 不经说明有某种能力，而且成功地做到了。
Eg. He was able to flee Europe before the war broke out.
3) 在否定句或与感官动词连用时，could与waswere able to可以通用。
Eg. He hurt his leg and couldn’t wasn’t able to play football.
三、情态动词加动词的时态：
n.
1. 情态动词 + be + adj.P.P.
介词短语
V-ing
Eg. That man must be a thief.
Tom may be at home.
Mary must be from American.
They can’t be learning English now.
Mike must be playing basketball now.
2. 情态动词 + have + P.P. + O.
1) S + should have + P.P. + O. 本来应该做某事但实际上没有做
Eg. I should have told you the news earlier.
You should have helped him.
2)

S + shouldn’t have + P.P. + O. 本来不应该做某事但实际上做了
43
Eg. You couldn’t have seen Tom yesterday for he went to England last week.
It couldn’t have rained last night for the ground is dry.
7) S + cancould have + P.P. + O. 本来能够做某事但实际上没有
做 原本很可能发生某事
Eg. You could have turned to me for help.
You should have been more careful. You could have been killed by the car
just now.
8) S + maymight have + P.P. + O. 主语可能已经做了某事某事
可能已经发生（可能性较小）
Eg. The film might have begun.
They might have left.
9) S + needn’t have + P.P. + O. 主语本不需要做某事但实际上做了
Eg. You needn’t have washed my shoes. They are still clean.
Tom needn’t have come yesterday.

考试必备 英语语法
四、情态动词用法特例：
1) can but “只好、至多不过”：
Eg. We can but do our best. 我们只好尽力而为。
With no key on him he can but wait outside the door.
2) can’t help but do sth, “不得不做…”
can’t help doing sth. “情不自禁的做…”
can’t help (to) do sth. “不能帮忙做…”
Eg. The girl couldn’t help but live on herself.
The refugees couldn’t help crying when they returned to their motherland.
I am sorry that I can help (to) repair your bike.
3) can not … too … = can never … too … “无论怎样 …… 都不过分、
越……越……”：
Eg. We can’t thank you too much for what you have done for us.
You can never do the work too well.
You can never be too careful when crossing the street.
4) maymight … but … “我承认 …… 是事实， 但是 ……”：
Eg. He may have lived here for years, but he has very few friends here.
Tom may have learnt Chinese for a long time, but he still can not
communicate in Chinese freely.
5) maymight as well “还是 …… 的为好”：
Eg. It’s too late. You might as well not go.
I may as well book a tale in advance.
6） may well主要用于加强推测的语气，表示具有较大的可能性。如：
Eg. It may well be true.
那很可能是真的。
What you say may well be true.
你说的很可能是事实。
Her grandpa may well be over eighty.
她的祖父可能已有80多岁了。
That may well have been their intention.
这很可能是他们的意图。


高考英语情态动词陷阱题总结归纳
1. “Mike is often absent from class.” “Tell him he _____ answer for it if he goes
on behaving like that.”
A. shall B. will C. would D. can
2. “I promise that she _____ get a nice present on her birthday.” “Will it be a
great surprise to her？”
A. should B. must C. would D. shall
3. You _______ pay too much attention to your reading skill, as it is so important.
A. cannot B. shouldn’t C. mustn’t D. needn’t
4. “Is John coming by train？” “He should, but he _____ not. He likes driving
his car.”
A. must B. can C. need D. may
5. “I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter.” “It ____ true
because there was little snow there.”
A. may not be B. won’t be C. couldn’t be D. mustn’t be
6. “Do you think he is lazy？” “I _____ so once, but I don’t now.”
A. may have thought B. can have thought
C. may think D. might think
7. Their answers are exactly the same — one of them ______ from the other.
A. must copy B. must have copied
C. should copy D. should have copied
8. You _____ be right, but I don’t think you are.
A. can B. could C. must D. should
9. “I thought you wouldn’t mind.” “Well, as a matter of fact I don’t, but
you _____ me first.”
A. should ask B. should have asked
C. must ask D. must have asked
10. “I called you yesterday. A woman answered, but I didn’t recognize her
voice.” “Oh, it _____ my aunt Jean.”
44

考试必备 英语语法
A. must be B. must have been
C. might be D. can have been
11. That car nearly hit me; I ______.
A. might be killed B. might have been killed
C. may be killed D. may been killed
12. It’s a very kind offer, but I really _____ accept it.
A. mustn’t B. needn’t C. can’t D. don’t
13. The police still haven’t found her, but they’re doing all they _____.
A. may B. can C. must D. will
14. You _____ practise the drums while the baby is sleeping.
A. needn’t B. mightn’t C. mustn’t D. won’t
15. You _____ him the news; he knew it already.
A. needn’t tell B. needn’t have told
C. mightn’t tell D. mightn’t have told
16. As she’s not here, I suppose she _____ home.
A. must go B. must have gone
C. might go D. might be going
17. Are you still here？ You ______ home hours ago.
A. should go B. should have gone
C. might go D. may have gone
18. “I called you yesterday. A woman answered, but I didn’t recognize her
voice.” “Oh, it _____ my aunt Jean.”
A. must be B. must have been
C. might be D. can have been
19. I _______ have met him a long time ago. Both his name and face are very
familiar.
A. may B. can C. would D. should
20.“Shall we go shopping？” “Sorry, we _______ buy anything now because
none of the shops are open.”
A. mustn’t B. needn’t C. can’t D. shouldn’t
21. They often go to the restaurants for meals. They _____ be very poor.

A. mustn’t B. can’t C. may not D. needn’t
22. I didn’t see her in the meeting room this morning. She ______ have spoken
at the meeting.
A. mustn’t B. shouldn’t C. needn’t D. couldn’t
23. He ______ the test again, in which case, his mother will be very disappointed.
A. might fail B. must have failed
C. should fail D. could have failed
24. “Why didn’t she come to the meeting yesterday？” “I’m not so sure.
She ______ ill.”
A. should be B. should have been
C. must be D. might have been
25. Why did you just sit and watch？ You _______ me.
A. could help B. should help
C. could have helped D. must have helped
26. “You ______ your teacher for help. He is kind-hearted.” “Yes. A whole day
_______.”
A. can ask, will waste B. must have asked, had wasted
C. could have asked, was wasted D. shouldn’t have asked, would
be wasted
27. “Is there a flight to London this evening？” “There _______ be. I’ll phone
the airport and find it out.”
A. must B. might C. would D. can
28. “Show me your permit, please.” “Oh, it’s not in my pocket. It ______.”
A. might fall out B. could fall out
C. should have fallen out D. must have fallen out
29. “Look at these tracks. It _______ be a wolf.” “Don’t be so sure. I think it
_______ be a fox.”
A. must; could B. may; might C. need; must D. could; need
30. “Did Jim come？” “I don’t know. He _______ while I was out.”
A. might have come B. might come
C. mush have come D. should have come
45

考试必备


九、虚拟语气
英语语法
If + S + should + V + O,
= Should + S + V + O,
S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.
S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.

Eg. If I were to see her again, I would tell her that I love her.
= Were I to see her again, I would tell her that I love her.
If she were to leave at five, she would get there at 7 o’clock.
= Were she to leave at five, she would get there at 7 o’clock.
If it should rain tomorrow, the sports meet would have to be put off.


2. 将来情况的虚拟；
4. 错综时间的虚拟。
= Should it rain tomorrow, the sports meet would have to be put off.
If it should be sunny tomorrow, we would have a picnic in the park.
= Should it be sunny tomorrow, we would have a picnic in the park.

注意: 含有 should 的条件句, 主句可以用一般现在时或一般将来时。
Eg: If there should be another flood, what shall we do?


3. 过去情况的虚拟；
表示“本可能发生却未发生的事情”, 条件从句用过去完成时, 主句用would
shouldcould might have done sth..
句式结构：
条件句 主句
If + S + had + P.P. + O, S + shouldshouldcouldmight + have + P.P. + O.
= Had + S + P.P. + O, S + wouldshouldcouldmight + have + P.P. + O.
Eg. If he had taken his doctor’s advice, he might not have died so soon.
= Had he taken his doctor’s advice, he might not have died so soon.
If he had realized that, he would have run away while there was still time.
= Had he realized that, he would have run away while there was still time.
If you had followed my advice, you might have succeeded.
= Had you followed my advice, you might have succeeded.

4. 错综时间的虚拟:
当条件状语从句表示的行为和主句表示的行为所发生的时间不一致时，动词的形式要依
46
S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.
Ask her to leave a message if she should come.
虚拟语气的概念：虚拟语气是一种特殊的动词形式, 用来表示说话人所说的话不是一个
事实，而只是一种假设、愿望、建议或怀疑等等。

主要有四种情况的虚拟：
1. 当前情况的虚拟；
3. 过去情况的虚拟；

1. 当前情况的虚拟:
表示“当前不太可能出现的情况”, 条件从句一般用过去时，主句用
wouldshouldcouldmight do sth.
句式结构为：
条件句 主句
If + S + were + 表语, S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.
= Were + S +表语, S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.
If + S + V-ed + O, S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.
Eg. If I were Andy Lou, I would be in Hong Kong now.
If I were rich enough, I would buy a BMW.
Were I handsome, I would be an actor.
If I had a car, I would pick you up at the station.
If I could speak good English, I would try to get a job in Microsoft.

2. 将来情况的虚拟:
表示“将来不太可能出现的情况”, 条件从句用should do sth., were to do sth.或一
般过去时, 主句用 wouldshouldcouldmight do sth.
句式结构：
条件句 主句
If + S + were to + V + O,
= Were + S + to + V + O, S+ wouldcouldshouldmight + V + O.

考试必备
据它所表示的时间来调整。
①从句的动作与过去事实相反，而主句的动作与现在或现在正在发生的事实不符。
句式结构：
条件句 主句
If + S + had + P.P. + O,
= Had + S + P.P. + O,
S + wouldshouldcouldmight + V + O.
S + wouldshouldcouldmight + V + O.
英语语法


注意：在正式英语文体中, 如果if 引导的条件从句中有should, were 或助动词had时,
可将它们置于句首, 替代 if。
Eg: Were it all true, it would still not excuse their actions.
Had the captain been more careful, his ship would not have sunk.
Should any visitors come, I would say you are not here.

5. if only 引导的虚拟从句：
If only引导的虚拟语气的句子翻译为“要是……就好了”。
句式结构：








S + were + 表语.
S + V-ed + O.
S + should + V + O.
S + had hadn’t + P.P. + O.
Eg: If you had worked hard enough, you would be a college student now.
= Had you worked hard enough, you would be a college student now.
If you had seen the doctor in time, you would be fine now.
= Had you seen the doctor in time, you would be fine now.
If he hadn’t gone to swim in the river that day, he might have been alive today.
= Had he not gone to swim in the river that day, he might have been alive today.
②从句的动作与现在事实相反，而主句的动作与过去事实不符。
句式结构：
条件句 主句
If + S+ were + P, S + wouldshouldcouldmight + have + P.P. + O + A.
= Were + S + P, S + wouldshouldcouldmight + have + P.P. + O + A.
If + S + V-ed + O, S + wouldshouldcouldmight + have + P.P. + O + A.
Eg: If he were free today, we would have sent him to Beijing.
If he knew her, he would have greeted her.

③从句的动作与过去发生的情况相反，而主句的动作与现在正在发生的情况相反。
句式结构：
条件句 主句
If + S + had + been + V-ing + O, S + wouldshouldcouldmight + be +
V-ing + O + A.
= Had + S + been + V-ing + O, S + wouldshouldcouldmight + be
+ V-ing + O + A.
Eg: If it had not been raining too much, the crops would be growing much
better.
If he had been working hard, he would be working in the office now.

47
If only + S + were to + V + Ｏ.
Eg: If only I were a millionaire.
If only I had a BMW.
If only I were to see her again.
If only it should rain tomorrow.
If only I hadn’t wasted so much time.
If only I had spent more time practicing my oral English.

6. suppose (supposing), 引导的虚拟从句：
译为“如果、假如……”
Eg: SupposeSupposing it were fine tomorrow, would you go climbing the
mountain with us?


7. If it were not had not been for… …
意思是“要不是……” 。
Eg: If it had not been for your help, we would not have achieved so much in our
SupposeSupposing you met him now, what would you say to him?

考试必备
work.
If it were not for the wise decision, we

8. It’s (abouthigh) time +S + V-ed + O:
could not be living a happy life.
英语语法
从句一般用虚拟语气。
句式结构：
S + suggested that + S + (should) + V + O + A.
be + P.P. + A.

从句表示“该做而未做的事”, 是一种婉转的建议, 注意从句中的动词用一般过去时。
Eg: It is high time we began to work.
We’ve enjoyed the evening, but it’s time we went home.
It’s about time the boy learned to behave himself.

9.名词性从句中的虚拟语气：
①主语从句中的虚拟语气
在表达惊异、惋惜、遗憾、理应如此等意义的主语从句中常使用虚拟 语气，其虚拟语其的结
构为： should + 动词原形，主句中的谓语动词形式不限。
基本句型：
(1) It is admirabledreadfulextraordi naryoddremarkablesadadvisable
annoyingdisappoi ntingsurprisingupsettingfrighteningbetterbest
curiousdesirableimportantstrangepeculiarproper necessary
natural … that …
(2) It is a pitya shame no wonder that…
(3) It is suggestedrequesteddesiredproposed … that …
(4) It worries me that …

It is + adj.n. + that + S + (should) + V + O + A.
be + P.P. + A.
Eg: It’s important that we (should) mater English.
It’s necessary that the river (should) be prevented from being polluted.
It is natural that a mother (should) love her child.

②宾语从句中的虚拟语气
a. 英语中，如：advise, ask, demand, desire, decide, insist (坚决要求) , order,
propose, request, suggest(建议) 表示请求、要求、命令或建议等意义的动词所接的宾语

48
Eg: The teacher advised that we should make good use of every minute here.
The Party asked that we should serve the people with our heart and soul.

注意：当insist的意思为：坚决认为，坚持说 ；suggest的意思为：表明，暗含，暗示
等时，宾语从句一般不用虚拟语气。如：
Eg: Tom insisted that he hadn’t stolen the watch.
His smile suggested that he had succeeded in this exam.

b. 在believe, expect, suspect, think, imagine等动词的否定句或疑问句中的宾语从
句常用虚拟语气。
其虚拟语气的结构为： should + 原形动词。
Eg: Can you believe that he should kill a tiger?
Can you imagine that he should take the first place in the long jump contest?

c. S + wish + (that)… 的宾语从句中虚拟语气:
表示“主语希望……”
句式结构
S + wereweren’t + 表语.
S + V-ed + O.
S + wish + (that) + S + were to + V + Ｏ.
S + shouldwould + V + O.
S + had + P.P. + O.
S + hadn’t + P.P. + O.
Eg: I wish (that) I were handsome.
I wish (that) he weren’t so lazy.
I wish (that) I knew how to operate this computer.
I do wish (that) everything would be as quiet as before.

考试必备
I wish (that) I had followed your advice.
I wish (that) we hadn’t worked overtime yesterday.

英语语法
Eg: His suggestion is that we should do our work more carefully.
Their plan is that they should build a new factory in their hometown.
The teacher’s order is that we should clean the classroom at once.

④同位语从句中虚拟语气

d. would rather, had rather, would sooner，would just as soon等之后的宾语从句
常表示与客观事实不相符的一种愿望，故使用虚拟语气。
句式结构：



would rather
would sooner
were + P.
+ O +

V-ed + O + A.
had + P.P. + O + A.
hadn’t + P.P. + O + A.
S + had rather

表示请求、要求、命令、建议等名词advice, desire, decision, idea, instruction, order,
plan, proposal, recommendation, request, requirement, suggestion, wish充当句子的
主语或宾语且后面接同位语时，同位语从句都需用虚拟语气。
句式结构：
a. 作主语:

would just as soon
前两个表示“主语宁愿宾语现在或将来做某事”
后两个表示“主语宁愿宾语过去作过或没做过某事”
Eg: I would just as soon you didn't go there.
I would rather you didn't tell me about that.
I would rather you hadn’t spoken so rudely to her.

注意: 表示“主语宁愿自己干某事” 时不用虚拟语气。


would just as soon
had rather would sooner
S+ would rather + V + O + A.

Eg: I would rather stay at home this evening.
I would just as soon go to the cinema tomorrow.

③表语从句中的虚拟语气
表示请求、要求、命令、建议等名词advice, desire, decision, idea, instruction, order,
plan, proposal, recommendation, request, requirement, suggestion, wish充当句子的
主语而后面接表语从句时从句需用虚拟语气。
句式结构：
One’s + n. + is that + S + (should) + V + O+ A.
be + P.P. + A.

49
One’s + n. + that + S + (should) + V + O+ A.
+ V + O + A.

be + P.P. + A.
译为：“主语的……的建议……”
Eg: My suggestion that we (should) go to the cinema this evening has been
accepted by all my friends.
b. 作宾语:
S + V +
one’s +n. + that + S + (should) + V + O+ A.
be + P.P. + A.
译为：“主语……建议”
Eg: The headmaster has accepted our suggestion that the library (should) be
kept open till 11 o’clock.
We followed his advice that we should ask our teacher for help.
He told us his idea that he should go to university.

10. 状语从句的虚拟语气
①目的状语从句中的虚拟语气
a. 在for fear that, in case, lest引导的目的状语从句中，若用虚拟语气时，从句谓语
为： should + 动词原形。并且 should不能省略
Eg: She examined the door again for fear that a thief should come in.
He started out earlier lest he should be late.
b. 在so that, in order that所引导的目的状语从句中，从句中的谓语为：

考试必备
can may could might will would should + 动词原形。
Eg: He goes closer to the speaker so that he can hear him clearer.
He read the letter carefully in order that he should not miss a word.

英语语法
④原因状语从句中的虚拟语气
在amazed, angry, annoyed, astonished, disappointed, frightened, happy,
pleased, proud, sorry, surprised, upset等后面的状语从句中常用虚拟语气。其虚拟语气
的结构为：

②让步状语从句中的虚拟语气
a. 在even if, even though 所引导的让步状语从句中，可用虚拟语气，主句、从句的
结构与if所引导的条件从句结构相同。
Eg: Even if he were here himself, he should not know what to do.
Nobody could save him even though Hua Tuo should come here.
b. 在whatever， whichever，whenever，whoever, wherever，however,
no matter wh-word 等引导的让步状语从句中，从句虚拟语气结构为：
a.) may +动词原形(指现在或将来)。
Eg: We will finish it on time no matter what whatever may happen.
We will find him wherever no matter where he may be.
b.) may +完成式(指过去) ，主句结构不限。
Eg: You mustn’t be proud whatever no matter what great progress you may
have made.
We must respect him no matter whatwhatever mistakes he may have made.
c.) 在though, although等引导的让步状语从句中，从句虚拟语气结构为 should +
动词原形，主句结构不限。
Eg: Although Though he should often be late, he is a good student.
Although Though he should be secretary, he must obey the rules.

③方式状语从句中的虚拟语气
在as if, as though引导的方式状语从句，如果与事实相符，用正常的句式，如果不是
事实或可能性不大，常用虚拟语气。
Eg: It looks as if it is going to rain.
She speaks English as if she were a British.
They began to talk warmly as if they had known each other for long.
He coughed twice as if someone should come.


50
a.) should + 原形动词(指现在或将来)
Eg: He was angry that you should call him by name.
I was astonished that he should not answer such an easy question.
b.) should + 完成式, 指过去
Eg: I’m very sorry that you should have failed the exam.
I was very surprised that Father should have known what I did yesterday.
11. S + 情态动词 + have + P.P. + O + A. 结构的虚拟：
① S + should have + P.P. + O. 本来应该做某事但实际上没有做
Eg: I should have told you the news earlier.
You should have helped him.
② S + shouldn’t have + P.P. + O. 本来不应该做某事但实际上做了
Eg: You shouldn’t have told him my secret.
You shouldn’t have given your son so much pocket money.
③ S + ought to have + P.P. + O. 本来应该做某事但实际上没有做
Eg: Tom ought to have reviewed his lessons last night.
You ought to have spent more time in learning English when you were young.
④ S + ought not to have + P.P. + O. 本来不应该做某事但实际上做了
Eg: You ought not to have driven so carelessly.
They ought not to have been allowed to swim in the lake.
⑤ S + must have + P.P. + O. 过去一定发生过某事
主语过去一定做过某事
Eg: It must have rained last night for the ground is wet.
He must have lived in America for many years for he speaks perfect English.
⑥ S + can’tcouldn’t have + P.P. + O. 过去不可能发生过某事
主语过去不可能做过某事
Eg: You couldn’t have seen Tom yesterday for he went to England last week.
It couldn’t have rained last night for the ground is dry.

考试必备
⑦ S + cancould have + P.P. + O. 本来能够做某事但实际上没有做
原本很可能发生某事

Eg: You could have turned to me for help.
You should have been more careful.
You could have been killed by the car just now.
⑧ S + maymight have + P.P. + O.

Eg: The film might have begun.
They might have left.
⑨ S + needn’t have + P.P. + O. 主语本不需要做某事但实际上做了
Eg: You needn’t have washed my shoes. They are still clean.
Tom needn’t have come yesterday.

12. 含蓄条件句
主语可能已经做了某事
某事可能已经发生（可能性较小）
英语语法
Eg: I wouldn’t have dreamed of it.
这是我做梦也不会想到的。

高考英语虚拟语气陷阱题总结归纳
1. I forget where I read the article, or I _____ it to you now.
A. will show





B. would show
D. am showing

C. am going to show

2. “It looks as if he were drunk.” “So it does. _____.”
A. He’d better give up drinking B. He shouldn’t have drunk so much
C. Health is more important than drink D. I wonder why he is always doing so
3. “Mary looks hot and dry” “So _____ you if you had so high a fever.”
A. do
tomorrow.”
A. will come B. is coming
A. won’t B. didn’t
没有空气，就没有生命。
A. didn’t B. hadn’t
A. won’t B. didn’t
____ at once.
A. should be; be operated on
C. was; should be operated
B. were; must be operated on
D. was; be operated on
B. wasn’t, shouldn’t be sent
D. shouldn’t be, shouldn’t be



C. came D. had come



C. don’t D. wouldn’t
C. don’t D. wouldn’t
5. “Shall I come tomorrow ？” “I’d rather you ______.”
6. “I’ve told him about it.” “But I’d rather you ______.”
7. “He will take you as well.” “But I’d rather he ______.”
C. doesn’t D. wouldn’t
8. All the doctors in the hospital insisted that he ____ badly wounded and that he
B. are C. will D. would
4. “He will come tomorrow.” “But I’d rather he _____ the day after
有些句子虽不含条件句，但意思和含条件句的句子差不多，这种句子叫含蓄条件句，这
种句子中 也用虚拟语气。含蓄条件句的“暗含”之意一般用三种方法来表达：
①条件暗含在短语中
Eg: Without air, there would be no living things.
(条件暗含在介词短语Without air中)
But for your help, I couldn’t have made so much progress.
要不是你的帮助，我不可能取得这么大的进步。
(条件暗含在介词短语But for your help中)
This same thing, happening in wartime, would result in disaster.
同样的事，如果发生在战时，就会酿成大祸。
(条件暗含在分词短语happening in wartime中)
②条件暗含在上下文中
Eg: You might stay here forever.
你可以永远待在这儿。(可能暗含if you wanted to)
They would have succeeded.
他们本来是会成功的。(可能暗含if they had kept trying)
③在不少情况下，虚拟式已经成为习惯说法，很难找出其暗含的条件

51
9. The patient insisted that he _______ ill and _______ to the hospital.
A. wasn’t, wasn’t sent
C. shouldn’t be, wasn’t sent
sent
10. The man in prison insisted that he _______ nothing wrong and _______ set free.
A. should do, should be B. had done, should be

考试必备
C. had done, had been D. should do, had been
英语语法
21. If only he _______ quietly as the doctor instructed, he would not suffer so
much now.
A. lies
B. be sent; was feeling
D. should be sent; should feel
B. Had he given up
to live.
A. would be freezing cold B. will be freezing coldly
C. would be frozen cold D. can freeze coldly
23. Yesterday, Jane walked away from the discussion. Otherwise, she ____
something she would regret later.
A. had said
B. did C. had D. would
B. said

C. might say D. might have said
B. drove; wouldn’t get
D. had driven; wouldn’t have got
B. has broken
24. You didn’t let me drive. If we ____ in turn, you ____ so tired.
A. drove; didn’t get
C. were driving; wouldn’t get
A. breaks



B. lay C. had lain D. should lie

11. I advised that he ______ to the hospital at once, but he insisted that he ______
quite well then.
A. was sent; felt
C. he sent; feel
A. Was he given up
22. Without the air to hold some of the sun’s heat, the earth at night ____ for us
12. ______ smoking, he would not have got cancer in the lung.
C. Did he give
_____.”
A. do
done.
A. don’t know B. hadn’t known C. wasn’t knowing D. wouldn’t know
15. “I’ve told everyone about it.” “Oh, I’d rather you _____.”
A. don’t B. hadn’t
there by tomorrow.
A. can’t get B. won’t get
A. knew, live
C. hadn’t got D. wouldn’t get
D. know, lived

17. “Do you know his address？” “No, I also wish I _____ where he _____.”
B. knew, lives C. know, lives
18. “Isn’t it about time you _____ to do morning exercises？” “Yes, it is.
Would you like to join us？”
A. begin B. have begun C. began D. had begun
19. It is hard for me to imagine what I would be doing today if I ____ in love, at
the age of seven, with the Melinda Cox Library in my hometown.
A. wouldn’t have fallen

B. had not fallen
D. were to fall


B. scored

C. should fall

C. couldn’t D. wouldn’t
16. It has been raining for a day, but even though it hadn’t rained, we _____
14. If I hadn’t been lucky enough to meet you. I really _____ what I would have
D. If he gave up
13. “I still haven’t thanked Aunt Lucy for her present.” “It’s time you
25. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it ______.
C. were broken

D. had been broken

26. But for the help you gave me, I _______ the examinations.
A. would have passed

附加练习
1. The teacher demanded that the exam _____ before eleven.
A. must finish
C. be finished
A. leave; for





B. would be finished
D. must be finished
D. to be left; for
D. has gone

B. would pass
D. wouldn’t pass C. wouldn’t have passed
2. She made the demand that the journalists _____ at once ______ Iraq.
B. leave; to C. left; to



C. was


3. He is talking so much about America as if he _____ there.
A. had been B. has been
A. did; set

4. The young man insisted that he _____ nothing wrong and _____ free.
B. had done; should be set
C. should do; be set
52
D. had done; must be set
20. He hesitated for a moment before kicking the ball, otherwise he ____ a goal.
A. had scored


C. would score D. would have scored

考试必备 英语语法
5. I suggested there ____ be a kind of language all could understand and use
____ .
A. can; it B. C. would; it D. may;
6. The suggestion has been made _____ the basketball game _____ put off.
A. for; to B. that; be C. which; should be D. to; being
7. The order came that the medical supplies _____ to Beijing for the Sars soon.
A. would be sent B. should send C. be sent D. must be sent
8. It is important that we _____ wild animals.
A. will protect B. should protect C. shall protect D. are protecting
9. Had you listened to the doctor, you _____ all right now.
A. are B. were C. would be D. would have been
10. _____ any change about the date, please tell me immediately.
A. Will there be B. Should there be
C. There will be D. There should be
11. _____ today, he would get there by Friday.
A. Would he leave B. Was he leaving
C. Were he to leave D. If he leave
12. Should it rain, the crops _____ .
A. would be saved B. would have been saved
C. will be saved D. had been saved
13. You _____ come earlier. The bus left a moment ago.
A. would B. should have C. may D. have
14. He treated me as thoughas if _____ his own son.
A. I am B. I would be C. I was D. I were
15. I _____ you some money, but I hadn’t any on me then.
A. would lend B. would have lent
C. could lend D. may have lent
16. A few minutes earlier and we _____ the rain.
A. have caught B. had caught
C. could have caught D. were to catch
17. --- “Have you ever been to Beijing?”

--- “No, but I wish I _____”
A. have B. will C. do D. had
18. I’m glad I went over all my notes; otherwise _____ .
A. I may have failed B. I’d fail
C. I’d have failed D. I’ll have failed
19. ---- “What will you do during the summer holiday?”
---- “I don’t know, but it’s high time _____ something.”
A. I’m deciding B. I’ll decide C. I decided D. I decide
20. What should we do if it _____ tomorrow?
A. should snow B. would snow C. snow D. will snow
21. If only I _____ my watch!
A. hadn’t lost B. haven’t lost C. didn’t lost D. don’t lose
22. You _____ such a serious mistake if you had followed his advice.
A. may not make B. might not make
C. shouldn’t have made D. might not have made
23. We _____ the work on time without your help.
A. hadn’t had finished B. didn’t have finished
C. couldn’t have finished D. can’t have finished
24. ---- “Where have you been?”
---- “I got caught in traffic; otherwise _____ sooner.”
A. I would be here B. I have been here
C. I had been here D. I would have been here
25. If it were not for the fact that you _____ ill, I would ask you to do this right
now.
A. were B. had been C. are D. should be

十、非谓语动词
非谓语动词的概念：在复合句中不充当谓语， 而充当其它句子成分的动词形式，包括
不定式、V-ing形式及过去分词。

不定式、V-ing、过去分词可充当的句子成分：
53

考试必备 英语语法

主语 宾语 表语 定语 状语 补语
不定式 YES YES YES YES YES YES
V-ing YES YES YES YES YES YES
过去分词 YES YES YES YES

I. 动词不定式
1. 句法作用: 动词不定式由“to+动词原形”构成。在句中可担任主语、表语、宾语、
宾语补足语、定语和状语等成分。
1)作主语
Eg. To do morning exercise every day is a good habit.
To come late to class is bad manners.
特别提醒: 不定式作主语时，常常放在句子后部，句前用“it”作形式主语。如上面两
句也可用于下面方式表达：
Eg. It’s a good habit to do morning exercise every day.
It’s bad manners to come late to class.
To learn English well takes patience.
It takes patience to learn English well.
2)作表语
Eg. His wish is to become a scientist.
Your job is to look after the children well.
3)作宾语
Eg. I want to go to college after finishing middle school. (动词want的宾语)
He is sure to come on time. (形容词sure 的宾语)
特别提醒:
在动词afford, aim, appear, agree, arrange, ask, decide, bother, care, choose,
come, dare, demand, desire, determine, expect, elect, endeavor, hope, fail, happen,
help, hesitate, learn, long, mean, manage, offer, plan, prepare, pretend, promise,
refuse, seem, intend, wait, wish, undertake 等动词后面的非谓语动词通常只能用不定
式，一定要牢牢记住。
4)作宾语补足语
不定式作宾语补足语主要用在一些表示使役和感官的动词后，如动词let, make (使),

have(使，让), get (使，让), tell (请，让), allow (允许), permit (允许), force (强迫), ask (请),
forbid (禁止), teach (教), show (表演), want (要求), help (帮助), see (看), hear (听), feel
(感受), notice (注意), observe (观察), watch (观看) 等。
Eg. My teacher told me to go to his office after class.
Don’t force me to do it. I have no time now.
特别提醒:
A. 在使役动词let, have , make 和感官动词see , hear , feel , notice , observe ,
watch 等后，不定式作 宾语补足语时必须去掉“to”，但句子变成被动语态时，“to”必须
加上。比较下面两组句子。
Eg. The boss made me work ten hours a day.
= I was made to work ten hours a day.
We saw someone steal into the room.
= Someone was seen to steal into the room.
B. help后的不定式作宾语或宾语补足语时，其 “to” 可以省去，也可以保留。
Eg. Your visit helps (to) improve the friendship between our two nations.
The girl often helps her mother (to) do some housework.
5)作定语
Eg. I have no time to listen to your excuse now.
We still have a lot of problems to solve.
特别提醒:
A. 当被修饰的名词是不定式后介词的逻辑宾语时，必须保留介词。
Eg. We have no money and no place to live in.
I need a pen to write with.
B. 不定式做定语所表示的动作通常是未发生的。
Eg. Mrs. Green will come to the party to be held this Saturday.
6)作状语：不定式在句中一般作目的状语和结果状语。
A. 目的状语
Eg. My brother went to Paris to study art last year.
To improve his pronunciation , he kept on reading English at least for an hour
every morning .
作目的状语时还可在不定式前加 in order to , so as to , in an effort to 等表示目的的
54

考试必备
短语。
Eg. The boy sat in the front row so as (in order) to hear more clearly.

特别提醒:
so as to不可用在句首。
Eg. In order to get there in time, my sister
B. 结果状语
got up earlier than usual.
此句中的“in order to ”不可用“so as to ”来代替。
英语语法
通常表示不定式动作发生在谓语动词表示的动作之前。主动式表示发生 在谓语动词的动
作之前的动作，同时其逻辑主语是该不定式动作的发出者; 被动式表示发生在谓语动词之前
的动作，同时其逻辑主语是该不定式动作的承受者。
Eg. I’m sorry to have kept you waiting.
The professor is said to have translated the book into three languages.
The book is said to have been translated into more than 30 languages.
Louise is said to have been sent to work in America.
特别提醒: 不定式的完成主动式和完成被动主要用在不定式作表语和宾语的句子中 ，在
不定式作定语、主语、状语的句子中，通常只用不定式的一般主动式和一般被动式。
D. 不定式的完成进行时：
主动形式：to have + been + V-ing +O.
Eg. Tom is said to have been living in Beijing for three years.
Mary is said to have been playing badminton for two hours.
3. 不定式的否定形式
不定式的否定式是在to的前面加not, never或其它否定副词构成。（不能用don’t ,
doesn’t , didn’t 等助动词来否定）
Eg. Lucy begged her mother not to blame her again for that.
I warned him never to be late again.
4. 不定式的复合结构
不定式的复合结构由“for+名词或代词+动词不定式”构成。这里的名词或代词 好似其
后动词不定式的逻辑主语。
Eg. I think it a good idea for her to study music.
A school is a good place for people to study in.
特别提醒:
在形容词后的不定式一般用其复合结构。
’s necessary for us to know the fact.
It’s important for us to master English, the most widely-used language in the
world.

不定式作结果状语时，通常用在too…to…, enough to …, so…as to … only to结构中。
Eg. The room is too small to hold so many people .
He is tall enough to reach the apples on the tree.
The woman was so careless as to leave her car unlocked.
2. 动词不定式的时态和语态：
A. 不定式的一般时：
主动形式：to + V not to + V;
被动形式：to be + P.P.; not to + be + P.P.
通常表示不定式的动作发生在谓语 动词动作之后或（几乎）同时发生。主动式表示不定
式的逻辑主语是该不定式动作的执行者；被动式表示 不定式的逻辑主语是该不定式动作的承
受者。
Eg. A lot of young people are learning to drive cars.
They refused to help us.
The girl would like to be taken to the park by her mother this afternoon.
B. 不定式的进行时：
主动形式：to be + V-ing
通常表示不定式动作正在进行，与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生。
Eg. They are said to be having a meeting now.
Premier Wen is reported to be paying a state visit to the USA now.
They seem to be talking about something important.
C. 不定式的完成时：
主动形式：to have + P.P.
被动形式：to have been + P.P.

55

但在一些表示对某人的“称赞 ”、“责备”等意义的形容词后，如kind, good , nice,
unwise , clever, silly , wrong , foolish , stupid , careless , rude , impolite等词，其后用
“of + sb.+ to do sth. ”结构。

考试必备
Eg. It’s so kind of you to give me so much help .
= You’re so kind to give me so much help.
It’s unwise of them to take such an action.
= They’re unwise to take such an action.
5. 不定式的独立结构：
英语语法
Eg: Tom is said to have gone to China.
= It is said that Tom has gone to China.
Tom Hanks is reported to be starring in a new film.
= It is reported that Tom Hanks is starring in a new film.
Our teacher is said to have resigned.
= It is said that our teacher has resigned.
His new novel is reported to have been made into a film.
= It is said that his new novel has been made into a film.
A new lab is said to be built in our school.
= It is said that a new lab will be built in our school.
Tom is said to have been learning Chinese for two years.
= It is said that Tom has been learning Chinese for two years.
II. V-ing形式

不定式可作独立结构，用于修饰整个句子，常见的有：to begin with (首先), to tell the
truth (老实说), to make a long story short (长话短说), so to speak (可以这么说), to be
brief exact frank honest (简单地说 确切地说 坦率地说 坦白地说), to say nothing
of ( 姑且不说), 等等。
Eg:
To begin with
, on behalf of all your American guests, I wish to thank you
for the incomparable hospitality.

To be honest
, I don’t like her.

To make a long story short
, she is in hospital now.

To be exact
, it is 10 o’clock now.
6. 用不定式的主动形式表达被动意义的情况
A. 在have, need等动词句型中，不定式作定语时只用主动形式表达被动意义
Eg. We haven’t got enough food to eat.
She needs someone to depend on.
B. 动词不定式在作表语的形容词后，有时句子的主语虽然尽管是不定式的承受者，但不
定式仍用主动形式。
Eg. The soup is sour to drink.
The man is hard to deal with.
7. 两个重要的句式结构：
S + be + P.P. (said, reported, predicted…) + to + V + O + A.
































be + V-ing + O + A.
have + P.P. + O +A.
have + been + V-ing + O + A.
be + V-ing + O +A.
havehas + P.P. + O + A.
havehas + been + V-ing +O+A.
56
= It + be + P.P. (said, reported, predicted…) + that + S + will + V + O +A.

1. 句法作用: V-ing由“动词+ing”构成，通常担任句子 的主语、宾语、表语、定语、
状语和补语等成分。V-ing形式可在句中起名词作用，但同时保留其动 词特征，可带自己的
宾语或状语，构成V-ing短语。
1) 作主语:
Eg. Getting up early is a good habit .
Talking about a plan is easier than carrying it out.
特别提醒: 当句子表语是no (any) use , no (any) good, a waste of time 等时，常将
动名词短语放在句后，把形式主语放在句首。
Eg. It’s no use arguing about it with him.
Is it any good doing so?
2) 作表语:
Eg. My job is teaching English.
Our duty is serving the customers heart and soul.
(我的工作是全心全意为顾客服务。)
3) 作定语:
A. V-ing放在被修饰词之前作定语时，用来说明被修饰词的场所或用途的。
an opening speech 开场白
= a speech for opening

考试必备
a walking stick 拐杖
= a stick for walking
a waiting room 候车室，候诊室
= a room for waiting
英语语法
remember to do something记住要做的事，事情还没做

Eg. I remember seeing her once somewhere.
remember doing something记得曾经做过的事

Eg. We must try to get everything ready before Father comes back.
B. V-ing放在被修饰词之后作定语时，用来说明被修饰词正在做某事，V-ing与被修饰
词形成逻辑 上的主谓关系，相当于定语从句中在先行词和从句动词之间省略了
“whowhichthat + be”。
Eg: The boy standing there is my best friend.
= The boy
whothat is
standing there is my best friend.
The dog barking now belongs to my grandpa.
= The dog which
that is
barking now belongs to my grandpa.
4) 作宾语:
Eg. My wife hates smoking and drinking.
特别提醒:
A. 在介词后的非谓语动词只能用V-ing形式。
watching TV. Eg. You should work tonight instead of
try to do something设法做某事，努力做某事

Eg. He couldn’t open the front door, so he tried pushing the back door open.
try doing something尝试做某事

Eg. You’d better stop making any noise in class.

stop doing something

停止正在做的事情

Eg. The man was tired , so he stopped to have a rest.
stop to do something 停止原来的事，开始做另一件事
（to do something 作目的
状语）
Eg. When do you mean to start?
mean to do something 打算（故意）做某事

Eg. Do you mean writing another letter to him ?
Missing this bus means waiting for another two hours.
You’d better think it over before making the decision.
B. 在动词finish, enjoy, mind, suggest, miss, keep, imagine, practise, advise, give
up, consider, delay, avoid等动词后，只能用V- ing作宾语，而不能用动词不定式。
Eg. She enjoys listening to pop music.
If you keep practicing speaking English every day, you will certainly be
able to speak it well.
C. 有些动词后用V- ing作宾语，或者用动词不定式作宾语，意义上没有太大差别，如
begin , start , like , love , hate , intend , continue , dislike 等动词。 但在有些动词后接
V-ing和动词不定式意思有明显差别，如forget, remember, try , stop , mean, can’t help
等动词。
Eg. Don’t forget to meet Mr. Anderson at the station this afternoon.
mean doing something 意思是…，意味着…

D. 在作表语的形容词busy和worth后，其宾语只能用V- ing。
Eg. The students are busy preparing for the final examinations.
This book is worth reading again.
= This book is worthy to be read again.
E. 在谓语动词是need, want, require等动词时，用V- ing的主动形式作宾语表示被动
意义，但如果改用不定式作宾语表示同样意义时则必须用被动形式。
句式结构：
S + want + V-ing
= S + want + to be + P.P.
Eg. This car needs repairing.
= This car needs to be repaired.
My shoes want washing.
= My shoes want to be washed.
These young trees require watering every day.
57
forget to do something
忘记要做的事,即没有做
Eg. I’m afraid I forget meeting you somewhere before.
forget doing something 忘记曾经做过的事
Eg. Please remember to post this letter.

考试必备
= These young trees require to be watered every day.
英语语法
Eg. Feeling tired, I lay down on the grass.
我感到疲倦，就在草地上躺下了。
His mother being ill, he had to take her to hospital.
d. 主句动词含有“必须”、“不得不”等意思时，作状语的现在分词（或独立主格结构）一
般表示原因。例 如：
Eg. The rain having ruined my hat, I had to buy a new one.
因为雨水把我的帽子弄坏了，所以不得不 买顶新的。
B. 现在分词作时间状语在意义上相当于时间状语从句，可译成“……时；当……时”，
以强 调谓语动词的动作与分词的动作同时发生，在其前可加when, while, as等。例如：
Eg. Reaching the river, we pitched camp for the night.
我们到达河边时，就搭起帐篷准备过夜。
Working in the factory, I learnt a lot from the workers.
在工厂工作期间，我从工人那里学到了很多东西。
C. 现在分词作方式或伴随状语
Eg. The teacher came into the classroom, holding a book in his hand.
老师走进教室，手里拿着一本书。
Talking and laughing, the students left the classroom.
学生们说说笑笑地离开了教室。
D. 现在分词作让步状语
可在前面加上连接词though, even if, whether … or以示强调。例如：
Eg. Whether walking or sleeping, he is always thinking of the plan.
无论走路还是睡觉，他总是想着这个计划。
注意: 现在分词在句中作状语时可表示时间、原因、条件 、伴随和结果等。通常可以改
为相应的从句或并列句。如：
Eg. Walking along the street, he met his old friend. (时间)
→When he was walking along the street, he met his old friend.
Not having received his reply, she decided to write a second letter.(原因)
→Because she hadn't received his reply, she decided to write a second letter.
Seeing from the top of the hill, you will find the city more beautiful.(条件)
→If you see from the top of the hill, you will find the city more beautiful.

F. 在 listen to, stick to, devote … to, be devoted to, look forward to, object to,
pay attention to, be used to, contribute to, be opposed to, get down to, What do
you say to (= HowWhat about + V-ing + O) 等
短语动词中 , 因这里的to是介词， 后面只能接V-ing形式。
Eg. This driver is used to driving in all kinds of weather.
We are all looking forward to going for an outing next week.
What do you say to going to the cinema this evening?
5) 作宾语补足语:
V-ing形式作宾语补足语，主要用在某些动词如see, hear, notice, watch, keep, find, get,
have, feel等后与一个名词（或代词）构成复合宾语。这时V- ing形式和句子的宾语之间存
在着逻辑上的主谓关系，并且V- ing形式表示宾语正在进行的动作。例如：
Eg. He saw a girl getting on the tractor.
= He saw a girl and she was getting on the tractor.
Do you hear someone knocking at the door?
6) 作状语:
作状语的V-ing形式是现在分词，其逻辑主语是主句的主语。在做题时，同学们分辨不
出是用过去分词，还是用现在分词（被动形式）。要解决这个问题，同学们就要分析分词与
句子主语的关 系，如果分词与句子主语是主谓关系，即分词的动作是句子主语发出的，这时，
我们要用现在V-ing （各种形式）；如果分词与句子主语是动宾关系，即分词的动作是句子主
语要承受的，这时就要用过去分 词（只有一种形式）。
A. 现在分词作原因状语
a. be的现在分词短语常表示原因（构成“being + adj. n”）。例如：
Eg. Being so excited, many of us could not go to sleep that night.
由于太兴奋了，那天晚上我们中许多人都 睡不着。
Being Party members, we should take the lead in everything.
因为我们是党员，所以凡事都应带头。
b.含有“知道”、“忘记”等心理活动的现在分词短语一般表示原因。例如：
Eg. Not knowing her address, we couldn’t get in touch with her.
类似的词语有：noticing, thinking, learning, sensing等。
c. 由连系动词组成的分词短语（包括分词独立主格结构），一般表示原因。

58
All the students sat in the classroom, waiting for their new English teacher. (伴随)

考试必备
→All the students sat in the classroom, and they were waiting for their new
English teacher.
My parents went to the park yesterday, leaving me alone at home. (结果)
→My parents went to the park yesterday, and they left me alone at home.
2. V-ing形式的时态和语态:
A. V-ing形式的一般时:
主动形式: V-ing;



not having + P.P.;


not + V-ing;
not being + P.P.;
英语语法
Your coming is an honor to all of us. （作主语）
Do you mind myme opening the window? (作宾语)
She insisted on myme going to the cinema with her. (作宾语)
I remember hishim once telling me the joke.（作宾语）

B. V-ing的复合结构由“名词或代词主格+分词”构成(属于独立主格结构)。 如上所述，
V-ing作状语时，V-ing的逻辑主语通常是主句的主语，但如果V- ing的逻辑主语不是主句
的主语时，则必须在V-ing前加上一个名词或代词主格。
Eg. Weather permitting, we shall go to visit the Great Wall.
= If weather permits, we shall go to visit the Great Wall.
The meeting being over, the people walked out of the hall in order.
= When the meeting was over, the people walked out of the hall in order.
There being no bus, we had to walk home.
= Because there was no bus, we had to walk home.
Her mother being ill, she had to look after her.
= Because her mother was ill, she had to look after her.
C.某些固定用法的V-ing结构的逻辑主语不是主句的主语， 这种结构是不可改变的。
generally speaking 一般来说
judging byfrom 根据…判断
Eg. Generally speaking, his explanation is correct.
Judging from his accent, he must be from the north.
4. there be 的不定式与V- ing形式：
A. there be 的不定式形式是there to be，用在接不定式作宾语的动词后面或介词后
面。
Eg. I don’t mean there to be any unpleasantness.
I don't want there to be any misunderstanding on this point.
The students expected there to be more time for them to review their lessons
before the final exams.
For there to be life, there must be air and water.
= In order that there may be life, there must be air and water.
It is impossible for there to be snow in summer here.
B. there be的动词V-ing形式是there being, 多用于介词后面。
59
被动形式: being + P.P.
B. V-ing 形式的完成时:


主动形式：having + P.P.;
被动形式：having been + P.P. not having been + P.P.;
A. 动词V-ing的一般式表示该动作与谓语动作同时发生或在谓语动作之后发生，完 成
式则表示该动作发生在谓语动作之前，在句中只能作状语表示时间和原因。
Eg. Standing on the top of the hill, you can see as far as the seaside. (分词动作
与谓语动作同时发生)
The fish can eat a person in two minutes, leaving only bones. (分词动作在谓语动
作之后发生)
Having finished his homework, the boy went out to play football. (分词动作在谓
语动作之前发生)
B.动词V- ing的主动式表示动作是由句子主语发出，而被动式表明主语承受该动作。
Eg. Being noticed by so many people, she felt nervous, not knowing what to
say.
Not having been washed in the correct way, the coat has faded.
C. 动词V-ing的否定式是在一般式和完成式的前面加not (never)。注意完成式的否定
式应将not (never)加在having前。如：
Eg. Not having heard from her son for a long time, the mother worried a great
deal.
3. V-ing的复合结构：
A. 在V-ing前加上名词的所有格或宾格来说明
V-ing动作发出者的结构形式。通常用来做主语或宾语。
Eg. Tom’s winning the game made us happy. （作主语）

考试必备
Eg. They spoke of there being danger.
I always dream of there being a swimming pool in my yard.
5. There be 的独立主格结构：
Eg: There being no bus, we had to walk home.
There being too many people, the bus is crowded.
III. 过去分词（P.P.）
英语语法
“whowhichthat + be”。以上句子相当于：
Eg. The man (whothat was) killed in the accident was a thief.
The English (that is) spoken in America is different from the English (which
is) spoken in Britain in pronunciation.
B. V-ing作定语与P.P.作定语的区别：
V-ing作定语所表示的动作通常是正在进行，与所修饰的名词之间有主动的逻辑主谓关

过去分词有规则和不规则两种，规则动词的过去分词与过去式相同，即在动词词尾
加-e d构成，不规则动词的过去分词有其固定形式，需要逐个记忆。过去分词在句中起形容
词和副词的作用， 在句中充当表语、宾语补足语、定语和状语等成分。
1) 作表语
Eg. I feel a little tired.
The boys are excited.
特别提醒：
A. P.P.作表语与被动语态的区别：
P.P .作表语虽有被动含义，但只说明主语处于某种状态或主语的感觉、状态，不强调动作；
而被动语态则强 调动作的过程。试比较：
Eg. The glass is broken .
The glass was broken by my son.
B. 动词V- ing作表语和P.P.作表语的区别：
作表语的分词在句中已几乎变成了形容词，动词V- ing表示主语（通常是物）所具有的
特征， 和主语的关系是主动的，P.P.表示主语（通常是人）的状态或感觉，和主语多为被动
关系。
Eg. The day was so charming !
The news was disappointing to him.
She was disappointed at the news.
2) 作定语
Eg. The man killed in the accident was a thief.
The English spoken in America is different from the English spoken in
Britain in pronunciation.
特别提醒：
A.

P.P.作后置定语时，通常相当于定语从句中先行词与从句中的动词之间省略了
60
系；而P.P.作定语所表示的动作通常是已经过去或完成的，及物动词的P.P.作定语与所修饰的
名词之间有被动的逻辑主谓关系。试比较：
Eg. the falling leaves
the fallen leaves
the ruling class
the ruled class



= the leaves that are falling
= the leaves that are on the ground
= the class that rules
= the class that is ruled
C. 不定式和动词V- ing的被动语态及P.P.作定语的区别:
它们作定语的区别主要表现在动作发生的时间上，试比较：
Eg. the bridge to be built next year (不定式表示的动作还未发生)
the bridge being built now
the bridge built last year
the meeting being held now
the meeting held yesterday
3) 作宾语补足语
句式结构：S + V + O + P.P. + (by + Doer) + A.
Eg. After getting off the bus, I found my wallet stolen.
I had my hair cut yesterday.
She couldn’t make herself understood by the foreigner.
I will have my bike repaired this afternoon.
She made herself seen by waving her arm to us.
4）作状语
P.P.在句中一般可作时间、原因、方式、伴随、条件、结果、让步等状语。
Eg. Given more time, I’ll do it better.
Seen from the top of this building, our campus looks beautiful.

(现在分词表示的动作正在进行)
(过去分词表示的动作已经完成，且被动)
the meeting to be held tomorrow

考试必备
特别提醒:
英语语法
8. All her time _______ experiments, she has no time for films.
A. devoted to do

When it is seen from the top of the building, our campus looks beautiful.

C. devoting to doing
A. completed








B. devoted to doing
D. is devoted to doing



A. P.P.作时间、原因、条件、让步等状语时，可改写成相应的状语从句，如上述前两句
可改为：
Eg. If I am given more time, I’ll do it better.

B. 动词V-ing形式和P.P.作状语的区别：
动词V-ing形式作状语时，V-ing的动作是由主句中的主语自己发出的；P.P.作状语时，< br>P.P.的动作是主句中的主语所承受的。
Eg. Seeing from the top of the tower, I could see the whole town.
Seen from the top of the tower, the whole town looks very beautiful.
C. V-ing表示主动、进行；
P.P.表示被动、完成。
特别提醒：过去分词没有时态和语态变化，它只表示被动或已完成的动作。

高考英语非谓语动词陷阱题总结归纳
1. Everyone in our class was working hard and doing what we could _______ a
good college.
A. enter B. to enter
B. hope
C. entering D. entered
D. hoped
D. practised
2. He ran as fast as he could _____ to catch the early bus.
A. to hope
A. practise
A. improve
A. doing
A. cleaning
C. hoping
C. practising
3. He spent every minute he could _____ spoken English.
B. to practise
4. Before going abroad he devoted all he could _______ his oral English.
B. to improve C. improving D. to improving
B. to do C. being doing D. to be done
5. He knows nothing about it, so he can’t help _______ any of your work.
6. She can’t help ____ the house because she’s busy making a cake.
B. to clean C. cleaned D. being cleaned
7. While shopping, people sometimes can’t help _____ into buying something
they don’t really need.
A. to persuade

B. persuading C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
61


9. All the preparations for the project ______, we’re ready to start.
B. have been completed
D. been completed






B. was, support
D. is, to support
B. have been completed
D. been completed
B. was, support
D. is, to support



C. had been completed
A. being, support




10. Such _______ the case, I couldn’t help but______ him.
C. has been, supporting
A. completed
11. All the preparations for the project ______, and we’re ready to start.
C. had been completed
A. being, support
12. Such _______ the case, so I couldn’t help but______ him.
C. has been, supporting
13. The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier, ______ it more
difficult.
A. not make B. not to make
young people.
A. provide B. to provide C. providing D. provided
D. having tied
15. The murderer was brought in, with his hands ______ behind his back.
A. to be tied B. being tied C. tied
police.
A. finds
______.
A. argued B. to be argued C. to be arguing D. being argued
18. The silence of the library was sometimes broken by an occasional
cough or by the sound of pages _______.
B. found C. being found D. will find
17. The court hears about 120 cases a year; visitors are welcome to see a case
16. Anyone ______ trying to take knives on board flights would be caught by the
C. not making D. do not make
14. The purpose of the scheme is not to help the employers but _____ work for

考试必备
A. turned
A. of taking
your life.
A. you fly B. your flight C. flight D. flying
21. Not only should you get used ______ under difficult conditions but also
should pay more attention ______ your work well.
A. to work, to do
C. to work, to doing

look forward to doing sth
be opposed to doing sth
object to doing sth
stick to doing sth
take to doing sth
admit doing



















盼望做某事
反对做某事
反对做某事
坚持做某事
开始做某事
喜欢上做某事
承认做了某事
注意做某事
把某人的时间用于(奉献于)做某事
等于做某事，能胜任做某事
你认为做某事怎么样?
B. to working, to doing
D. to working, to do
B. having turned C. to be turned
B. taking C. to take
D. being turned
19. Remind me _______ the medicine tomorrow.
D. take
英语语法
A. put B. to put C. putting
A. paid B. paying
D. having put
25. I got out of the taxi, _____ the fare and dashed into the station.
C. to pay D. having paid
26. Hearing the news, he rushed out, ______ the book ______ on the table and
disappeared into the distance.
A. left; lain open
C. leaving; lie opened
B. leaving; lying open
D. left; lay opened



20. Once your business becomes international, _____ constantly will be part of
27. The boss insisted that every minute ______ made full use of ______ the work
well.
A. be, to do B. was, doing C. be, doing D. was, to do
28. The old professor told us every part of the materials should be made use of
______ the power station.
A. to build
A. making
year.
A. carried out
A. to have go
B. carrying out C. carry out D. to carry out
D. having to go
D. making to wash
31. Who do you think you’d like _____ with you, a boy or a girl?
B. to have to go C. to have gone
32. Who did the boss _____ his car this time?
A. make wash B. make to wash C. make washing
myself.
A. found B. finding
B. to have come
B. come
B. prove
C. to find D. for finding
34. How happy we are! The holiday we have been looking forward _______ at last.
A. to has come
A. comes
A. proves
62
C. to having come D. has come
C. coming
C. proving
D. came
D. be proved
35. The man you referred to _____ just now.
36. The theory he sticks to ______ to be of no use in our studies.
33. You can never imagine what great difficulty I had ______ your house all by
B. building C. build
B. to make C. how to make
D. built
D. having made
29. Does the way you thought of _______ the water clean make any sense?
30. The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see ______ the next get down to doing sth
pay attention to doing sth
be equal to doing sth


devote one’s time to doing sth
What do you say to doing sth?
22. Both of my parents insisted _______ a computer for me, but I don’t think it is
necessary.
A. to buy
something else.”
A. typing B. to be typed C. typed D. to type
24. She took her son, ran out of the house, _____ him in the car and drove quickly
to the nearest doctor’s office.

B. buying C. on buying D. in buying
23. “Do you have anything more ______, sir?” “No. You can have a rest or do

考试必备
37. The work he devoted his time to _____ worth praising.
A. was
A. to help
A. spending
B. be
B. help
B. being spent
C. being D. been
C. helping D. helped
38. I think this is the very work that we must finish ____ her.
39. Which do you enjoy ____ your weekend, swimming or fishing?
C. spend D. to spend
D. are
D. to prove


D. to stands
D. to is
D. to came
40. What the boy enjoys _____ to have a room of his own.
A. being B. to be
A. prove B. proved
A. standing
A. is
A. came
A. is
A. Follow
A. Follow
A. Follow
A. Get
A. Drink
A. Watch

C. is
41. Nothing that he suggested _____ to be of any use.
C. proving
42. The old house we paid a visit _____ at the top of the hill.
B. to stand C. to standing
B. to be C. to being
43. The life he is now used _____ quite different from ours.
44. The work he paid special attention _____ to nothing.
B. to come C. to coming
B. to be C. to being
45. The result what he said would lead _____ his regret in the future.
D. to was




D. Followed
D. Followed
D. Followed
D. Having got
46. _______ the road round to the right and you’ll find his house.
B. Following C. To follow
B. Following
B. Following
B. To get
B. To drink
B. Watching
C. To follow
C. To follow
C. Getting
C. Drinking
C. To watch
47. _______ the road round to the right, you’ll find his house.
英语语法
A. Look B. Looking C. To look D. Having looked
D. When left
53. _____ it with me and I’ll see what I can do.
A. Leave B. Leaving
A. Turn B. Turning
A. Try
A. Give
C. If you leave
54. _____ down the radio — the baby’s asleep in the next room.
C. to turn D. To have turned
C. To try D. To have tried
C. Giving D. Given
55. _____ some of this juice — perhaps you will like it.
B. Trying
B. To give
56. ______ him enough time to get home before you telephone.
57. ______ left when you get to the end of the street.
A. Keep B. Keeping
A. Put
A. Wait
together.
A. Join B. To join C. Joining D. Joined
61. I don’t want to listen a long story — just _____ me the result.
A. tell B. telling C. to tell D. to be telling
62. Why stand there watching — _____ and help us!
A. come B. coming
A. save B. to save
A. prepare, cook



C. to come
C. saving


D. to be coming
63. Don’t waste your money on silly things — ______ it.
D. having saved

64. First ______ the rice by washing it, then ______ it in boiling water.
B. preparing, cooking
D. prepare, cooking C. preparing, cook
C. To keep D. Kept
58. ______ your hand over your mouth when you cough.
B. Putting C. To put D. To be putting
D. Having waited
59. ______ until the lights have turned to green.
B. To wait C. Waiting
60. ______ the pieces of cloth with a loose stitch before finally sewing them

48. _______ the road round to the right, the blind man asked a boy to guide him.
49. _______ to the top of the hill, and you can see the whole of the town.
50. ______ the milk and set a good example to the other children.
D. Having drinking
D. Have watching
51. ______ me, and then try to copy what I do.
52. _____ through this book and tell me what you think of it.

63
65. To test eggs, _____ them in a bowl of water: if they float they’re bad, if they
sink they’re good.
A. put B. putting C. to put D. to be putting
66. ______ French well, she went to France to live with his cousins.

考试必备
A. Study B. To study
A. Sleep B. To sleep
A. Keep
A. Improving
passenger.
A. put B. to be putting
difference.
A. have
A. to ask
finish a report.
A. to go
family.
A. consider B. considering

C. to consider D. considered

B. to have gone C. going D. having gone
74. Before you decide to leave your job, _______ the effect it will have on your
B. having
B. asking
C. and have D. and having
D. having asked
72. I felt it a great honour ______ to speak to you.
C. to be asked
C. to put D. putting
71. When you’re learning to drive, _______ a good teacher makes a big
C. Studying
C. Sleeping
D. Having studied
D. Having slept
67. _____ late in the morning, Mr. Smith turned off the alarm.
68. ______ the flies out, we had to shut all the doors and windows.
B. To keep
B. To improve
C. Keeping
C. Improve


D. Having kept
69. ______ their service, the workers of the hotel are active in learning English.
英语语法
A. set up B. setting up C. have set up D. having set up

79. The discovery of new evidence led to _______.
A. the thief having caught
C. the thief being caught
A. visit

B. catch the thief
D. the thief to be caught
C. walk in D. walking in

80. She looks forward every spring to _______ the flower-lined garden.
B. paying a visit
81. To test eggs, _______ them in a bowl of water: if they float they’re bad, if
they sink they’re good.
A. put
A. to get
B. putting C. to put D. to be putting
B. getting C. to be getting D. having got
82. “Where is David?” “He is upstairs ______ ready to go out.”
83. “Mum, why do you always make me eat an egg every day?” “________
enough protein and nutrition as you are growing up.”
A. Get
A. lost
A. to find
B. Getting C. To get D. to be getting
D. to have lost
84. He was reading his book, completely _______ to the world.
B. losing C. to lose
85. We looked everywhere for the keys, but they are nowhere _______.
B. to have found C. to be found D. being found
D. do not do
D. smoked
86. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him ___.
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it
A. smoke B. smoking C. to smoke
87. A cook will be immediately fired if he is found _______ in the kitchen.
88. Finding her car stolen, _______.
A. a policeman was asked to help
C. it was looked for everywhere
customers?”
“The key ______ the problem is to meet the demand ______ by the customers.”
A. to solving, making



B. to solving, made
D. to solve, made

C. to solve, making
B. the area was searching thoroughly
D. she hurried to a policeman for help
D. Having improved
70. He looked around and caught a man ______ his hand into the pocket of a
73. I would love _______ to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to
75. Robert is said _______ abroad, but I don’t know what country he studied in.
A. to have studied B. to study
C. to be studying
A. it what to do with
C. what to do with it
A. seen carry
poor children.

64

D. to have been studying


B. what to do it with
D. to do what with it
D. saw carrying

76. It is said that in Australia there is more land than the government knows __.

89. “How do you deal with the disagreement between the company and the
77. Anyone _______ bags, boxes, or whatever, was stopped by the police.
B. seen carrying C. saw to carry
78. Mr Reed made up his mind to devote all he had to _______ some schools for
90. “What do you think made Mary so upset?” “_______ her new bike.”

考试必备
A. As she lost
it.
A. begins
A. lacked
B. having begun C. beginning D. begun
B. lacking of


C. lacking D. lacked in
B. not having invited
D. not having been invited

92. Though ________ money, his parents managed to send him to university.
93. Tony was very unhappy for _______ to the party.
A. having not been invited
C. having not invited
B. Lost C. Losing D. Because of losing
英语语法
104. Remember _______ off the light when _______ to bed.
A. turning, going B. to turn, to go C. turning, to go
105. _______ time, he’ll make a first-class tennis player.
A. Having given
United States.
A. Being founded B. It was founded C. Founded D. Founding
107. The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the ________.
A. 20 dollars remained
C. remained 20 dollars
A. having hung
D. be spoken
D. for sending it to
D. Having taken
having a hard time.
A. settled B. setting C. to settle D. being settled
110. Having a trip abroad is certainly good for the old couple, but it remains
_______ whether they will enjoy it.
A. to see B. to be seen C. seeing D. seen

111. Tony was very unhappy for _______ to the party.
A. having not been invited
C. having not invited
B. not having invited
D. not having been invited





B. 20 dollars to remain
D. remaining 20 dollars
C. hangs D. being hung

B. To give C. Giving D. Given
106. _______ in 1636, Harvard is one of the most famous universities in the
D. to turn, going

91. The research is so designed that once _______ nothing can be done to change
94. Though I have often heard this song _______. I have never heard you __ it.
A. being sung, sang
C. sung, sing
A. spoken
A. to send
A. Taking

B. sang, singing
D. to be sung, to sing
C. speak
108. The picture _______ on the wall is painted by my nephew.
B. hanging
109. With a lot of difficult problems ________, the newly-elected president is 95. He is a man of few words, and seldom speaks until _______ to.
B. speaking
96. When I handed the report to John, he said that George was the person ___.
B. for sending it C. to send it to
B. Being taken C. Taken
97. _______ on time, this medicine will be quite effective.
98. The film star walked to his car, ______ a crowd of journalists.
A. followed by B. following by C. to follow
they would cost.
A. to explain B. explaining C. to be explaining D. having explained
100. Please excuse me _______ your letter by mistake.
A. to open B. to have opened C. for opening D. in opening
101. Please remember _______ the plants while I’m away.
A. watering B. to be watering C. to water D. being watering
102. Certainly I posted your letter — I remember ______ it.
A. posting
A. to tell

B. to post
B. telling
C. to be posting
C. to have told
D. have posted
D. having told
65

103. Stop _______ me to hurry up. I can only go so fast.
D. to be followed by
99. After describing the planned improvements, she went on _______ how much
112. “Good morning. Can I help you?” “I’d like to have this package
_______.”
A. be weighed
A. makes
B. to be weighed C. to weigh
B. to make


C. made


D. weighed
D. has made
113. What have we said _______ her so happy?
114. What worried the child most was ______ to visit his mother in the hospital.
A. his not allowing B. his not being allowed
D. having not being allowed C his being not allowed
A. that marked
115. “Which sweater is yours?” “The one _______ No. 9.”
B. was marked with C. which marked D. marked with

考试必备
116. If the car won’t start, _____ it.
A. try push B. try pushing C. to try pushing D. to try to push
英语语法
12. He likes ______, but he doesn’t like ______ today because it is too cold.
A. to swim; to swim
C. to swim; swimming




B. swimming; swimming
D. swimming; to swim

117. They stayed up until midnight _____ the old year out and the new year in.
A. and saw B. to see C. seeing D. for seeing

1. There ______ no classes yesterday, we paid a visit to the Great Wall.
A. was B. being C. were D. had been
2. The policeman rushed into the room only ______ an old lady lying on the
ground.
A. found B. find C. finding D. to find
3. The boy lay on the ground, his eyes ______ and his hands ______.
A. closing; trembling B. closed; trembling
C. closed; trembled D. closing; trembled
4.______, the girls raced on to the second runners.
A. Stick in hand B. With a stick in her hand
C. Sticks in hand D. Sticks in hands
5. Each of them got up early ______ to catch the early bus.
A. to hope B. hoping C. so that D. and
6. How pleased the Emperor was ______ what the cheats said!
A. hearing B. heard C. hear D. to hear
7. We should prevent pollution ______ happily.
A. from living B. living C. to living D. to live
8. I am busy now, so I can’t help ______ the machine.
A. to repair B. to have repaired C. repairing D. fixing
9. Jane came very close ______ a gold medal for Britain in the Olympics.
A. to win B. winning C. to winning D. to be won
10. The boy seated himself in the corner with his back ______ to his father.
A. turning B. to turn C. to be turned D. turned
11. ----By the way, when did you get your bedroom ______?
----Last week.
A. to paint B. painted C. painting D. to be painted

13. There is ______ what the weather will be like.
A. not knowing B. no knowing C. not know D. no known
14. The novel is said ______ into many languages.
A. to translate B. being translated
C. to have been translated D. having been translated
15. I’m examining the composition he has just finished ______ the possible
mistakes in it.
A. correcting B. to correct C. corrected D. correct
16. They would not allow him ______ across the enemy line.
A. to risk going B. risking to go C. for risk to go D. risk going
17. He spent as much time as he could _____ the child.
A. teaching B. to teach C. teach D. for teaching
18. ----Alice, why didn’t you come yesterday?
----I ______, but I had an unexpected visitor.
A. had B. would C. was going to D. did
19. How pleased the Emperor was ______ what the cheats said!
A. hearing B. to hear C. heard D. hear
20. ______ the room, a letter was laid on the ground.
A. Entering B. Having entered
C. He entered D. Mrs Green entering
21. They set out ______ for the ______ boy.
A. searching; losing B. searching; lost
C. to search; lost D. to search; missed
22. ______ her mother had come, her face lit up.
A. Hearing B. Having heard
C. When hearing D. When she heard
23. They arrived at their university very late, ______ the gate closely shut.
A. found B. to find C. find D. finding
66

考试必备
24. ----Do you have anything more ______, sir?
----No. You can have a rest or do something else.
A. typing B. to be typed
A. to be informed
C. informed




C. typed

D. to type

英语语法
A. their not being able
C. them not able


B. their being not able
D. them being able not


35. Which will you enjoy ______ your vacation, traveling abroad or working in the
countryside?
A. to spend B. spend C. spending D. spent
36. ----Will you please tell us how you can seize the robbers?
----I will spend a whole week ______ in your room to wait for their coming.
A. locking
A. informing


B. to lock


C. locked D. being locked

37. I regret ______ you that they are unable to come to your wedding tomorrow.
B. having informed
D. to inform
C. to notice

D. being noticed

C. to have been informed
A. noticing
25. The manager promised to keep me ____ of how our business was going on.
B. on informing
D. informing
26. With a lot of difficult problems ______, the manager felt worried all the time.
A. to settle B. settling
A. teaching B. teach
A. being interviewed
C. interviewing






C. settled D. being settled
C. who teaches D. who teaching
B. interviewed
27. Will those ____ the children from abroad come to the headmaster’s office?
28. After ______ for the job, you will be required to take a language test.
D. having interviewed
B. their being not able
D. them being able not


B. risking to go
D. risk going



38. He wondered if he could slip out of the lecture hall without anyone ______.
B. noticed


39. After ______ for the job, you will be required to take a language test.
A. being interviewed
C. interviewing
B. interviewed
D. having interviewed
D. to hear
29. They apologized for ______ to attend the meeting.
A. their not being able
C. them not able
A. to risk going
C. for risk to go


30. They would not allow him ______ across the enemy line. 40. He spoke in such a high voice ______ out in the street.
A. as to be heard B. to be heard C. as to hear
be set up in every town ______ 50 households or more.
A. having B. to have C. to have had D. having had
42. The building project ______ next year is, I think, not easy ______ in time.
A. being carried out; to complete B. carried out; to be completed
C. to be carried out; to complete D. to be carried out; to be completed
43. The reason ______ she gave for not coming to the party is that her mother
wouldn’t allow her to.
A. that B. what C. why D. because
44. Excuse me, could you tell me how to get to the Grand Hotel? I thought it was
41. As early as 1647 Ohio made a decision that free, tax- supported schools must
31. ______ to nuclear radiation, even for a short time, may produce variants(变异
体) of genes in human bodies.
A. Being exposed
C. Exposed






B. Having exposed
D. After being exposed

32. China became the 143rd member of the World Trade Organization on
December 11, 2001, thus ______ its 15-year wish to join the global trade body.
A. having realized B. realized C. realizing
in his heart for years.
A. filling; having hidden
C. filling; hidden


B. filled; hidden
D. filled; hiding

D. to realize
33. Tom looked at Jenny, tears ______ his eyes, and shouted out the words ______
on this corner, but I seem to ______ a mistake.
A. make B. be making C. having made D. have made
45. ----Here’s a new pair of shoes for you.
67
34. They apologized for ______ to attend the meeting.

考试必备
----Thank you, but there’s no need ______ a new pair for me.
A. to have bought B. to buy
A. his not allowing



C. buying D. to be buying

46. What worried the boy most was ______ to visit his father in the hospital.
B. his not being allowed
D. his being not allowed C. having not been allowed
A. working hard is necessary
B. to learn a foreign language is needed
C. it is important to master science
D. one should serve the people whole- heartedly
48. Everything ______ into consideration, they ought to have another chance.
A. to take
month.
A. carry out B. carrying outC. to carry out
A. to settle B. settling
D. carried out
D. being settled
B. taken C. to be taken D. taking
49. The officials discussed the plan that they would like to see ______ the next
英语语法
如被强调的是人，则后面可用who，whom等代替。
Eg: He met an old friend in the park yesterday.
It was an old friend that he met in the park yesterday.
It was in the park that he met an old friend yesterday.
It was yesterday that he met an old friend in the park.

2. 用助动词do, does或did来强调谓语动词。
Eg: Do come early.
He did send you a letter last week.
We’re pleased that she does intend to come.
He does play the piano well.
They did clean the classroom.
I do like English very much.

3. 用 “主语从句+be+被强调部分”，主语从句常用what引导。
Eg: John wants a ball.
= What John wants is a ball.
Mary gives piano lessons every day.
D. to type
D. informing
I want to know when they will arrive.
= What I want to know is when they will arrive.

注意事项:
1. It iswas…that… 强调句型的强调部分必须是对 thatwho 之后句子的某一成
分表示强调，如果 “It iswas...that”去掉，该句应该意思完整，不缺任何句子成分。
比较下面两个句子：
It was 7 o’clock when he came back.
It was at 7 o’clock that he came back.


他回来时7点钟了。
他是7点钟回来的。

= What Mary does every day is give piano lessons.

It was he whothat met an old friend in the park yesterday. (强调主语)
(强调宾语)
(强调地点状语)
(强调时间状语)

47. To do a bit for the motherland, ______.
50. With a lot of difficult problems ______, the manager felt worried all the time.
C. settled
51. ----Do you have anything more ______, sir?
----No, you can have a rest or do something else.
A. typing B. to be typed C. typed
C. informed
52. The manager promised to keep me ____ of how our business was going on.
A. to be inform B. on informing

十一、强调句
1.强调句的定义
强调是有效地进行思想交流的重要手段之一。人们 在交际过程中，为了使自己的思想能
为听者或读者恰当的理解，必须突出重要的内容，这就需要运用强调 的手段。
2.强调的构成
在现代英语中，人们可以通过语音手段、词汇手段、语法手段来进行强调。
1. 用“It iswas + 被强调部分 + that who …” 句型表示强调。
被强调的部分（通常是句子的主语、状语、宾语或宾语补足语）放在iswas的后面，

68
2. 强调原因状语从句时，句式为： “It iswas because … that …”
It was because the water had risen that they could not cross the river.

考试必备
正是由于水涨了，他们没有渡过河去。
It was because he was ill that Tom didn’t go to school.
正是因为他病了，汤姆才没有去上学。
It is because she likes English very much that Mary works hard at it.
正是因为玛丽很喜欢英语，她才学习很努力。
英语语法
“Totally by chance.”
A. it that
A. since


B. he that
B. as
C. it when

D. he which
D. he
3. Who was it _____ saved the drowning girl？
C. that
D. if
4. What is it _____ his daughter needs most？
A. what B. which C. that
5. _____ was very ______ that little Jim wrote the letter.
A. It, careful B. It, carefully C. He, careful D. He, carefully
6. It was when she was about to go to bed ______ the telephone rang.
A. since B. as C. that
C. that
D. then
D. when
7. It may have been at Christmas _____ John gave Mary a handbag.
A. before B. who
8. “Where did you find the professor who made the speech yesterday？”
“It was in the hall ______ the students often have a meeting.”
A. where
A. which
A. which
you are.
A. one
spent his childhood.
A. which, that B. that, which C. which, which D. that, where
13. It was the boy _____ had been in prison _____ stole the money.
A. who, where B. that, how


C. who, that D. that, which
C. where, that D. which, that
C. which D. in which
B. It was our being late 14. It was just in the room _____ he was born _____ he died.
A. where, which B. that, that
A. when
69
B. that
15. Was it five o’clock ______the fire broke out？
B. that C. what D. it
B. which
B. as
C. that D. when
D. that
D. what
9. It was what he meant rather than what he said ______ annoyed me.
C. what

10. It was his nervousness in the interview ______ probably lost him the job.
B. since C. that

3. 注意 “not ... until” 强调句型的变化，句式为“It iswas not until... that ...”。
比较下列句子：
Eg: She didn't remember her appointment with the doctor until she had
arrived home.
It was not until she had arrived home that she remembered her appointment
with the doctor.
Not until she had arrived home did she remember her appointment with the
doctor. （注意倒装结构）
4. It is／was…that…强调句型中，其一般疑问句句式为 “IsWas it + 被强调部分+
that … ” 。如：
Eg: Was it yesterday that you met Tom in the park?
Was it my mother who told you that I am here?
Is it English that you like best among all the subjects at school?
5. 强调句的特殊疑问句式为，“特殊疑问词+iswas + it + that +…”结构, 表示“究
竟是谁……，到底在哪里……”等等。
Eg: Who was it that you want to see?
Where was it that you saw the teacher?
Why is it that you want to change your mind?
When was it that you met her for the first time?

高考英语强调句陷阱题总结归纳
1. ____ that caused him to serve dinner an hour later than usual.
A. It was we being late
C. It was we were too late D. It was because we were late
2. “How was ______ they discovered the entrance to the underground
palace？”

11. It is the ability to do the job ______ matters not where you come from or what
12. It was in the small house ______ was built with stones by his father ______ he

考试必备
16. Was it at five o’clock ______the fire broke out？
A. when B. that C. which D. in which
英语语法
主谓一致分为三种情况： 1. 语法一致；
2. 内容一致；
3. 就近一致
1. 语法一致；
C. which D. while (1) 如果主语后面跟有with、together with, along with, but, except, like, in
addition to, including, besides, as well as, as much as, rather than, more than 等短语
再加一个名词时，谓语动词仍与主语（第一个词）保持一致。


C. since D. while Eg: A library together with 5000 books was given to our school as a gift.
Mr. Johnson as well as his wife and children is visiting the Great Wall now.
All but Tom have gone to the cinema.
(2) 用and连接的并列 主语，如果主语是同一个人、同一事物或同一概念时，谓语动词
用单数，否则用复数。
Eg: A teacher and writer is going to give us a speech.
C. That is D. There are Bread and butter is usually my breakfast.
The professor and scientist has already come.
A teacher and a writer are in the office.
(3) 不定式（短语）、动名词（短语）或主语从句作主语时，谓语动词用单数。
Eg: To learn English well
takes
effort.
B. that C. 不填 D. which
C. that, where
C. you
C. since
D. that, that
D. that you
D. after
Serving the people
is
my great happiness.
When we’ll go for an outing
has
not been decided yet.
How he can speak so good English
interests
us all.
(4) 用 and 连接的并列主语被each，every，no或 many a 修饰时，谓语动词用单
数。
Eg: Each boy and each girl
has
been given a gift.
No teacher and no student
is
in the classroom.
Every pen and every book has been lain on the desk already.
Many a boy and many a girl
is
interested in her lesson.
(5) each of + 复数代词，谓语动用单数。
复数代词 + each，谓语动词用复数。
Eg: Each of us
has
something to say.
Each of them
has
been given a piece of bread.
70


17. “Was it under the tree _____ you were away talking to a friend？” “Sure.
But when I got back there, the bike was gone.
A. that B. where
18. It’s more than half a century _____ my grandfather joined the Party and
became a servant to the people.
A. when B. that
19. It was lack of money, not of effort, _____ defeated their plan.
A. which B. as
◆精编陷阱题训练◆
1. —Who are making so much noise in the garden？
—_______ the children.
A. It is B. They are
2. It is _______ he often fails in exams ______ makes his parents worried about him.
A. what; that B. that; what
trees are planted.
A. what
A. where, that
A. it you
A. when
4. It is _____ my father worked _____ I work now.
B. where, when
B. not you
B. that



5. Was _____ that I saw last night at the concert？
6. It was ten o’clock _____ he came back home.
7. It was not until he came back _____ he knew the police were looking for him.
A. which B. since


十二、主谓一致
主谓一致的概念：主语和其谓语动词在人称和数上保持一致。

C. that D. before
C. that; that D. that
3. It is the protection for the trees _______ really matters, rather than how many
C. that D. what

考试必备
We each
have
a dictionary.
They each
have
done their work.
英语语法
Eg: Many a student
is
interested in English.
Many a teacher
has
resigned.
Many an apple
has
gone bad.




很多学生对英语感兴趣。
很多老师已经辞职了。
很多苹果已经坏了。
他犯了很多错误。

(6) none作主语，修饰可数名词复数时，谓语动词可用 单数也可用复数，但修饰不可数
名词时，谓语动词只能用单数。
Eg: None of us
are(is)
perfect.
None of these books
are(is)
mine.
None of his money
has
been found again.
None of this
worries
me.
(7) 名词如trousers, scissors, glasses, goods , clothes 等作主语时，谓语动词必须
用复数，但当它们前面有a pair of 或one pair of 修饰时，谓语动词只能用单数。
Eg: My trousers
are
black.
His glasses
are
expensive.
A pair of trousers
lies
on my bed.
A pair of glasses
was
given to me as a gift.
(8) 形复意单名词如：news; 以-ics结尾的学科名词如：physics, mathematics,
economics; 国名如：the United States; 报纸名如：the New York Times; 书名如：
Arabian Nights《天方夜谭》；以及the United Nations 等作主语时，谓语动词要用单数。
Eg: Arabian Nights
is
full of interesting stories.
The New York Times
is
a popular reading material for students.
Physics
is
my favorite subject.
(9) “aan + 名词 + and a half”、“one and a half + 名词” 、“the number of
+ 名词” 等作主语时，谓语动词要用单数。
Eg: An apple and a half
is
on the table.
One and a half days
has
passed.
The number of the students in our class
is
63.
(10) 百分数（或分数）+ of + 可数名词单数不可数名词，谓语动词用单数；
百分数（或分数）+ of + 可数名词复数，谓语动词用复数。
Eg: Twenty percent of the land
has
been turned into a playground.
Two thirds of the apple
is
rotten.
Sixty percent of the workers in the factory are women.
(11) Many aan + n. + V (单数）+ O. 表示复数的意思，译作 “很多……”。

71
Many a mistake
has
been made by him.
(12) A (large) quantity of + N. + V + O. 动词的数由名词决定；
A (large) amount of + N. (不可数）+ V (单三）+ O. 谓语动词用单数，但是，Large
quantities of + N. (pl. or uc）+ V (复数）+ O.
Large amounts of + N. (不可数）+ V (复数）+ O. 谓语动词用复数。
Eg: A large quantity of sugar
has
been put in the boiled water.
Large quantities of money
have
been wasted on the project.
A large amount of time
has
been spent on English.
Large amounts of time
have
been saved by the new invention.
(13) “This kind of +名词复数” 作主语时，谓语动词用单数；
“名词复数+ of this kind” 作主语时，谓语动词用复数。如：
Eg: This kind of apples
was
imported from America.
Apples of this kind
were
imported from America.
(14) “AAn + 单数名词 + or two” 作主语时，谓语动词用单数；
“One or two + 复数名词” 作主语时，谓语动词用复数。
Eg: A day or two
is
enough for this work.
One or two days
are
enough for this work.
A man or two
is
to be sent there to help them.
One or two men
are
to be sent there to help them.
(15) “A set of + 复数名词” 及 “A series of + 复数名词” 作主语时，谓语动词用
单数。
Eg: A series of debates
was
scheduled for the weekend.
The sales man told me that a good set of tires
was
guaranteed to run at least
fifty thousand miles.

2. 内容一致；
(1) 不定代词all, most, some 等作主语时，谓语动词的单复数取决于它们所指代的名
词的数。如：

考试必备 英语语法
Eg: One million dollars
is
a lot of money.
Ten miles
is
a long distance.
Two years
is
enough to learn a foreign language.

3. 就近一致
(1) 由here, there, where 以及状语提前构成的倒装句中，(有时主语不止一个时) 谓语
与靠近它的主语保持一致。如：

Eg: Here
comes
the bus.
There
is
a pen, two books and three pencils on the desk.
On the top of the mountain
stands
a tower.
Where
is
your mother?
Where
are
your friends?
(2) 由连词or, either … or, neither … nor, not only … but also, not … but 等连接的
并列主语，谓语动词与靠近它的主语保持一致。如：
Eg: Neither the students nor the teacher
knows
anything about it.
He or you
have
taken my pen.
Not only Tom but I
am
satisfied with the result.
Not only they but also we
are
interested in the film.

高考英语主谓一致陷阱题总结归纳
1. I, who____ your friend, will try my best to help you with your English.




















D. study

2. The rich ____ not always happy.

3. Neither Tom nor Jack and I ____ his students.

A. are studying


C. studies

4. Mary as well as her sisters ____ Chinese in China.
B. have studied

5. Neither my father nor I ____ at home.
6. Not only my brother but also I ____ good at painting. Both of us ____ good
72


人), the wounded (伤者）作主语时，谓语动词用复数。
(2) “the + 形容词（或分词）” 指一类人，如：the rich (富人), the living (活着的
Eg: The sick
have
been cured and the lost
have
been found.
The rich
are
eager to help the poor.
The wounded
have
been taken good care of .
The living
have
to cheer up and continue to live.
(3) 用and 连接的成对名词习惯上被看做一个整体时，如：bread and butter(面包加
黄油), knife and fork(刀叉)等作主语时，谓语动词用单数。如：

(4) 不定数量的词组，如：a part of, a lot of, lots of, one of, a number of, plenty of 等
作主语时，谓语动词的单复数取决于它们所修饰的名词。如：
Eg: A part of the textbooks
have
arrived.
A part of the apple
has
bee eaten up by the pig.
A lot of people
have
heard the news.
A lot of money
has
been spent on this project.
(5) 表示时间、金钱、距离、度量等的名词作主 语，尽管是复数形式，它们作为一个单
一的概念时，其谓语动词用单数形式。如：

考试必备
painters.,
are am ;are is


7. Every' boy and every girl ____ to attend the evening party.


world.

A. have been

to be

to be

D. has been
10. Every means ____ tried but without any result.
11. Alice, together with two boys,____ for having broken the rule.
A. was punished B. punished C. were punished D. being punished
like
C. would be
8. Over 80 percent of the population of China ____ peasants.
9. The population of China ____ larger than that of .any other country in the
英语语法
19. A chemical works____ built there.
A. is to being been C. were to been
20. The Olympic Games ____ held every ____ years.
four four
the world.









22. He is the only one of die students who ____ elected.
A. are
is one of the most interesting questions that ____ asked.

A. have
A. is;is


being


theatre.
A. is searching for



B. were searching for
D. were searching
C. are;them D. is;them
C. are D. were

D. were two Chinese

D. be
C. are searching for
A. is;il
A. is
A. is




't change
d
D. were

73



C. have been
C. is
been
D. are
24. Many a man ____ come to help us.
B. has
25.
B. are;are C. are;is D. is;are
26. The police ____ the murderer everywhere when he suddenly appeared in a
;five five

21. The United States of America one of the most developed countries in
12. The League secretary and the monitor____ asked to attend the .meeting this
afternoon.

13. The great writer and professor____.
A. is an old man

B. are both old men
C. is an old man and a young man

A. are
things as they are.
A. doesn' t change

14. There ____ a pen, two pencils and three books on the desk.

C. is
15. A large number of students in our class____ girls.
B. was
16. The number of deer, mountain lions and wild roses ____ much if people leave
trousers____ must have____ washed.
B. are;it
B. be
28. This pair of trouseis ____ too long for him.
29. One and a half bananas ____ left on the table.
B. are C. has D. have
C. get D. equal
D. seemes
30. Eight times eight ____ sixty - four.
A. is B. are
A. seems
31. Ten minutes____ an hour when one is waiting for a phone call.
B. seem C. seemed

32. ____of the money____ nm out.
A. Three-fifth; has B. Three-fifth; has been
17. The Arabian Nights ____ well known to the English.
A. is B. are C. was

18. Chairman Mao' s works ____ published.
A. has been been

考试必备
C. Three-fifths; has D. Three-fifths; have
33. The whole class ____ the teacher attentively.
A. are listening to B. is listening to C. are listening D. is listening
英语语法
47. They both have some friends; but his ____ more active.
A. is
A. is




B. will be
B. are
C. was



D. are
D. has
48. Both rice and wheat ____ grown in that country.
C. was

34. I have finished a large part of the book, the rest of which___ more difficult.
A. is B. are C. was D. were
35. Between the two rows of trees ____ the teaching building.
A. stand B. stands C. standing D. are
36. Large quantities of water ____ for irrigation.
A. is needed B. has -needed C. are needed D. need
37. That they were wrong in these matters ____ now clear to us all.
A. is
38. What we need____ good textbooks.
A. is
39. What you said just now____ the matter we are discussing.
A. have something to at B. has something to do with
C. had something to do with D. has been something to do with
40. More than one member ____ against the plan.
A. is B. are C. has D. have
41. When and where to build the new factory ____ yet.
A. has not decided B. is not decided
C. are not decided D. have not decided
42. Half of the fruit ____ bad.
A. are B. has C. is D. have
43. ____ either of your parents come to see you recently?
A. Have B. Had C. Has D. Is
44. Mathematics ____ the language of science.
A. are B. are going to be C. is D. is to be
45. My family ____ small.
A. is B. were C. are D. makes
46. The following ____ some other examples.
A. are B. is C. was D. were

49. Early to bed and early to rise ____ a good habit.
A. are B. is C. were D. was
50. To play basketball and to go swimming ____ useful for character-training.
A. was B. is C. are D. were


十三、介词的用法
I. 方位介词
1. above，over，on；below，under，beneath
a. above侧重于相对水平高度，不一定在正上方，其反义词是below。
b. over侧重于垂直高度，即位于正上方，其反义词是under。
c. on侧重于与物体表面接触，其反义词是beneath。
Eg: Be careful，there is a heavy box over your head.
The position he pointed to was below the sea level.
2. across，over，through，past
across意 为“横穿、穿越”，表示运动发生在物体的表面；over意为“跨过，越过”，
表示运动发生在物体的 上方；through意为“穿过，通过”，表示运动发生在某物的空间；
past意为“从……旁经过 ”，表示运动发生在某物旁边。
Eg: The Great Wall winds its way from west to east, across desert, over
mountains, through valleys till at last it reaches the sea.
3. in, on, to在方位名词前的区别。
in表示在范围之内；
to表示在某范围之外的地方；
on表示“毗邻”“接壤”。
Eg: Shandong Province islies in the east of China.
Japan islies to the east of China.
II. 时间介词
74

考试必备
1. at, in, on, by, after
at：
In：
On:
By:

After:
at 12 o’clock, at dawn, at daybreak, at Christmas
in the 1980‘s, in October, in the morning, in an hour
on October 1st, on a rainy day, on the eve of Christmas, on the
morning of January 1st.
We’ll have finished the work by ten o’clock tomorrow .
He works by day and sleeps by night.
He left home and went to the front after two days.
英语语法
in this way
by this meansby means of with this method 用这种方法
IV. 原因介词
Eg: She often hangs her head for shame.
He went red with anger.
The sports meet will be put off till next Saturday because of the heavy rain.
His illness was due to smoking and drinking.

Thanks to the Party’s good policy，the farmers are now living a happy and rich
life.
V. 介词与某些词类的搭配
1．名词与介词的固定搭配
(1)常与to搭配的名词：key, answer, visit, apology, introduction
(2)常与in搭配的名词：interest, satisfaction, expert
(3)常与on搭配的名词：mercy, congratulation
(4)常与其他介词搭配的名词：prize for, respect for, victory over, struggle with
2．形容词与介词的固定搭配
(1)与at搭配的形容词：angry, good, bad, clever,
frightened
(2)与of搭配的形容词：afraid, sure, certain, full, tired, fond, proud, worthy
(3)与with搭配的形容词：angry, strict, careful, busy, popular
(4)与in搭配的形容词：weak, strict, rich, interested, successful
(5)与to搭配的形容词：next, good, polite, kind, cruel, rude, known, married, close,
similar, due
(6)与for搭配的形容词：sorry, famous, fit, unfit, eager, anxious, hungry
(7)与from搭配的形容词：far, different, free, safe, absent, tired
(8)与about搭配的形容词：sorry, worried, anxious, careful, sure, certain
注意：
①同一形容词与不同的介词搭配其含义会不同。
He was tired of the work.
He is good to her.
75






他厌倦了那份工作。
他因工作而疲惫。
他对她很好。
He was tired from the work.
surprised, excited, puzzled,
I will go and see her after three o’clock.
2. for, from, since
for后接时段的名词词组，表示行为状态持续了多久。from 接时间点的名词词组，表示
行为或状态的起始点，而不涉及其持续时间的长短。since接时间点的名 词词组，不仅表示
行为或状态的起始点，而且还强调该行为或状态从起始点一直持续到此时此刻，因而与 延续
性动词的现在完成时连用。
Eg: Mr. Brown enjoyed the country life and lived there for almost fifteen years
after his retirement.
My younger sister began to learn dancing from the age of five.
He has been working in Tibet since he graduated from college.
III.工具、手段、方式介词
1．by, in, on三词都表示旅行的方式。
by: by sea, by water, by land, by rail, by train, buy air, by shipboat,
by plane, by spaceship
名词前有冠词、物主代词、指示代词等时用onin。
travel to New York in this plane；
go to school on my bike
说明:步行、骑马、骑骆驼均用on。
on foot, on horseback, on a horse, on the camel
2．With, by, in三词均译为“用”，表示行为的工具、手段或方式。
Eg: They are digging with a pickspade.
by hand；in ink
in EnglishJapanese

考试必备 英语语法
The medicine is good for her. 这药对她有好处。
②be of＋抽象名词＝形容词
be of great value＝ be very valuable
be of no use＝ be useless
be a man of wealth＝ be a wealthy man
③to与情感名词连用，表示“某种行动后产生的感觉”：
to＋one’s＋delightsurprise
＝to the delightsurprise of sb.
Much to my joy, he was quite from danger.
④at与某些名词搭配表示“一……就……”
at the sight of 一看到
at the thought of 一想到

高考英语介词陷阱题总结归纳
1. “You went late _______ the stadium yesterday evening, didn’t you?”
“Yes, my wife was a little late _______ the supper.”
A. to, with B. for, with C. for, for D. at, for
2. We were all worried over _______ you were sick.
A. that B. which C. what D. the fact that
3. They knew nothing about ______ he was a thief.
A. that B. which C. what D. the fact that
4. She must face up to _______ she is no longer young.
A. that B. which C. what D. the fact that
5. What he said at the meeting referred to _______ he was interested in the project.
A. that B. which C. what D. the fact that
6. Their belief is proved by the fact that the death penalty prevents murder.
A. that B. which C. what D. the fact that
7. The writer is not satisfied with _______ buses are too crowded.
A. that B. which C. what D. the fact that
8. Sometimes our opinions differ _______ what we choose to observe and how we
deal with what we’ve observed

A. which B. since C. because D. because of
9. “How long have you been an actor?” “_______ 1995, when I graduated from
college.”
A. After B. In C. From D. Since
10. “When did you became an actor?” “_______ 1995, when I graduated from
college.”
A. After B. In C. From D. Since
11. “How long have you worked on the farm?” “____ the end of last year.”
A. In B. By C. At D. Since
12. “How long will you work on the farm?” “____ the end of next year.”
A. In B. By C. At D. Since
13. “When did you leave the farm?” “____ the end of last year.”
A. In B. By C. At D. Since
14. Don’t be angry _______ me for not having written. I was really too busy.
A. about B. with C. to D. for
15. In those days, we had no phones, so we have to keep in touch _____ writing
often.
A. with B. of C. on D. by
16. We’ve talked a lot _______ films. How _____ television now?
A. of, with B. with, towards C. about, about D. for, about
17. We all regarded the poor old man ____sympathy.
A. as B. with C. of D. by
◆精编陷阱题训练◆
1. So far, several ships have been reported missing _______ the coast of
Bermuda Island.
A. off B. along C. on D. around
2. “How long have you stayed in this hotel?” “Not long, just ______ this
Monday.”
A. on B. since C. until D. after
3. The lift in that tall building went wrong and got trapped _____ floors. People
in it had no way to get out.
76

考试必备
A. in B. between C. among D. on
4. “What a terrible rain we are having!” “Yes. We are asked to pay more
attention to the information about the rain ______ flood.”
A. as well as B. so long as C. because of D. in case of
5. _____ their inexperience, they’ve done a good job.
A. Given
A. until
B. Supposed C. Considered
B. in

C. by
D. Concluded



D. to
6. They promise that the work would all be finished _____ next week.
7. _______ reading the letter, what has he done?
A. Because of B. Except
A. Past
C. Besides
C. Over
D. But for
D. Through
8. “How did the robber get in?” “______ an open window on the first floor.”
B. From
9. She knew nothing about his journey _______ he was likely to be away for
three months.
A. Except
A .except
weather.
A. besides
A. Except
and then.
A. in spite of B. instead of C. in case of D. in favor of
14. As it was almost time for the flight, all the passengers got ______ the plane.
A. around

十四、冠词
I. 不定冠词的用法
B. abroad C. aboard D. ahead
B. except for C. except

D. except that
12. ______ the weather, we had a pleasant time.
B. Except for C. But D. Besides
13. He always did well at school ______ having to do part-time jobs every now
B. except for C. except that
B. except when
D. in addition
10. He usually goes to work by bike _______ it rains.
C. except for D. except that
11. I found the island a wonderful place for our experiments _______ the hot
英语语法
Indefinite Article），还有一种是零冠词（Zero Article）。

义。英语中的冠词有三种，一种是定冠词（the Definite Article），另一种是不定冠词（the
不定冠词a (an)与数词one 同源，是一个的 意思。a用于辅音音素前，一般读作[?]，
而an则用于元音音素前，一般读做[en]。
1) 表示一个，意为one；指某人或某物，意为a certain。
Eg: A Mr. Ling is waiting for you.
2) 代表一类人或物。
Eg: A knife is a tool for cutting with.
Mr. Smith is an engineer.
3) 词组或成语。
a little a few a lot a type of a pile a great many many a as a rule in a
hurry in a minute in a word in a short while after a while have a cold have a
try keep an eye on all of a sudden

II.定冠词的用法
定冠词the与指示 代词this，that同源，有那（这）个的意思，但较弱，可以和一个
名词连用，来表示某个或某些 特定的人或东西。
1）特指双方都明白的人或物：
Eg: Take the medicine. 把药吃了。
Pass me the salt.
Have you seen the movie?
2）上文提到过的人或事：
Eg: He bought a house. I've been to the house.
I met a girl in the park yesterday. The girl is very beautiful.
3）指世上独一物二的事物：
Eg: the sun, the sky, the moon, the earth
4）单数名词连用表示一类事物或与形容词或分词连用，表示一类人：:
Eg: the dollar, the computer, the pig, the fox
the rich, the living, the wounded, the poor
5）用在序数词和形容词最高级，及形容词only, very, same等前面：
Eg: Where do you live? I live on the second floor. 你住在哪？我住在二层。
77
冠词是虚词，本身不能单独使用，也没有词义，它用在名词的前面，帮助指明名词的含

考试必备
That's the very thing I've been looking for. 那正是我要找的东西。
6）与复数名词连用，指整个群体：
Eg: They are the teachers of this school. (指全体教师)
They are teachers of this school. (指部分教师)
7）表示所有，相当于物主代词，用在表示身体部位的名词前：
Eg: She caught me by the arm.
She kissed me on the lips.
Someone pat me on the shoulder.
Eg: the People's Republic of China
the United States
the United Nations














她抓住了我的手臂。
她问了我的嘴唇。
有人拍了我的肩膀。
中华人民共和国
美国
英语语法
Eg: Failure is the mother of success. 失败乃成功之母。
4）物质名词表示一般概念时，通常不加冠词，当表示特定的意思时，需要加定
冠词:
Eg: Man cannot live without water. 人离开水就无法生存。
5）在季节、月份、节日、 假日、日期、星期等表示时间的名词之前，不加冠词: Eg:
We go to school from Monday to Friday.
Autumn is my favourite season.
Tomorrow is Monday.
6）在称呼或表示官衔，职位的名词前不加冠词:
Eg: The guards took the American to General Lee.
President Hu is now visiting the USA.
We made Tom monitor.
7）在三餐、球类运动和娱乐运动的名称前，不加冠词:








她会弹钢琴。
我每天拉小提琴。
格林一家人 (或格林夫妇)
老张一家人（或老张夫妇）
Eg: have breakfast, play chess, play football, play badminton
8）当两个或两个以上名词并用时，常省去冠词:
Eg: I can't write without pen or pencil. 没有钢笔和铅笔，我就写不了字。
9）当by 与火车等交通工具连用，表示一种方式时，中间无冠词:
Eg: by bus, by train, by bus, by air, by sea, by land
10）有些个体名词不用冠词:
Eg: school, college, prison, market, hospital, bed, table, class, town, church,
court 等个体名词，直接置于介词后，表示该名词的职能和作用，加定冠词the,表示具体地
点。
go to hospital
go to church
be in prison










去医院看病
去医院 (并不是去看病，而是有其他目的)
去教堂做礼拜
去教堂（并不是做礼拜，而是参观等其他目的）
在监狱服刑
在监狱（并不是服刑，在工作、探监等）
go to the hospital
go to the church
be in the prison

8）用在某些由普通名词构成的国家名称、机关团体、阶级、等专有名词前：
联合国
9）用在表示西洋乐器的名词之前：
Eg: She plays the piano.
I play the violin every day.
Eg: the Greens
the Zhangs
11) 用在惯用语中：
Eg: in the day, in the morning (afternoon，evening), the day after tomorrow,
the day before yesterday, the next morning, in the sky (water, field, country), in
the dark, in the rain, in the distance, in the middle (of), in the end, on the whole, by
the way, go to the theatre

III. 零冠词的用法
1) 国名，人名前通常不用定冠词：
Eg: China, America, England，Mary, Tom;
2）泛指的复数名词，表示一类人或事物时，可不用定冠词:
Eg:

Cows are useful animals.
They are teachers.






10) 用在姓氏的复数名词之前，表示一家人：
11)不用冠词的序数词：
a. 序数词前有物主代词
b. 序数词作副词 He came first in the race.
78
3）抽象名词表示一般概念时，通常不加冠词:

考试必备
c. 在固定词组中 at (the) first,first of all, from first to last

IV. 冠词与形容词+名词结构:
1) 两个形容词都有冠词，表示两个不同东西。
Eg: He raises a black and a white cat.
2) 如后一个形容词无冠词，则指一物。
Eg: He raises a black and white cat.

V. 冠词位置:
1) 不定冠词位置
不定冠词常位于名词或名词修饰语前。注意：
a. 位于下列形容词之后： such, what, many, half,
Eg: I have never seen such an animal.
Many a man is fit for the job.
他养了一只花猫。
他养了一只黑猫和一只白猫。
The black and the white cats are hers. 这只黑猫和白猫都是他的。
英语语法
This box is three times the size of that one.

高考英语冠词陷阱题总结归纳

1. “Do you know ______ English for ‘帅哥’?” “I’m afraid I don’t. I’m not
interested
in _______ English language.”
A. the, the B. the, 不填 C. 不填, the D. 不填, 不填
2. I couldn’t remember the exact date of the storm, but I knew it was ______
Sunday because everybody was at ______ church.
A. a, the B. a, 不填 C. 不填, a D. 不填, 不填
3. Which person do you refer to, the one with ______ long hair or the one with
_______ long beard?
A. a, a B. 不填，不填 C. a, 不填 D. 不填，a
D. an, a
4. I once watched ___ one-act play, which was played by ____ 11-year-old boy.
A. a, aw。w。 B. an, an C. a, anw。w。w
5. Before he was arrested, he had taken _______ one- month holiday, and stayed
in the country with ________ 18-year-old girl, one of his students.
A. a, a B. an, an C. a, an D. an, a
6. We hired _______ one-eyed man to play in our film, and we gave him _______
100-pound check for just one minute.
A. a, an B. an, a C. a, a D. an, an
7. “Have you seen _____ pen? I left it here this morning.” “Is it _____ black one?
I think I saw it somewhere.”
A. a, the B. the, the C. a, a D. the, a
8. “Have you seen _____ pen? I left it here this morning.” “Is it _____ black one?
I found it in the corner.”
A. a, the B. the, the C. a, a D. the, a
9. “Have you seen _______ new bike? I put it here just now.” “Is it _______ white
one? A boy has ridden it away.”
A. a; a B. a; the C. the; the D. the; a
10. My friend Mary is ___ beautiful girl and ___ girl everyone likes to work with.
79
b. 当名词前的形容词被副词as, so, too, how, however, enough修饰时，不定冠词
应放在形容词之后：
Eg: It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent.
So short a time.
Too long a distance.
c. quite，rather与单数名词连用，冠词放在其后。
但当rather，quite 前仍有形容词，不定冠词放其前后均可。如：quite a lot
d. 在as，though 引导的让步状语从句中，当标语为形容词修饰的名词时，不定冠词
放形容词后：
Eg; Brave a man though he is，he trembles at the sight of snakes.
当名词被比较级形容词修饰时，不定冠词通常置于比较级形容词之后。

2) 定冠词位置
定冠词通常位于名词或名词修饰语前，但放在all， both，double，half，twice，three
times等词之后，名词之前。
Eg: All the students in the class went out.

考试必备 英语语法
A. a, a B. a, the C. the, aw。 D. the, the
11. Jim is _______ brave boy and _______ boy never fearing anything.
A. a, a B. a, the C. the, a D. the, the
12. It is really ____ useful dictionary and ____ dictionary every one of us needs.
A. a, a B. a, the C. the, a D. the, the
◆精编陷阱题训练◆高.考.资.源.网
1. Since tasting the excitement of _____ big city life, she never wants to live in
_____ country again.
A. the, the B. 不填，不填 C. the, 不填 D. 不填，the
2. The operation is _____ success and the patient is now out of _____ danger.
A. a, the B. a, 不填 C. 不填, the D. 不填，不填
3. As _____ writer, he was _____ complete failure.
A. a, a B. a, the C. 不填，不填 D. a, 不填
4. How strange! These years my birthday always falls _____.
A. on the Sunday B. on a Sunday
C. on Sunday D. at a Sunday
5. This is _____ best kind of _____ pen you can get here.
A. the, the B. the, a C. the, 不填 D. a, the
6. As is known to us all, _____ tiger is in _____ danger of becoming extinct.
A. the, a B. the, 不填 C. a, 不填 D. 不填, the
7. He spent too much time talking on ______ phone while we were all busy at
_____ work.
A. the, 不填 B. a, 不填 C. 不填, 不填 D. the, the
8. As _______ unemployment is very high at the moment, it’s very difficult for
people to find _______ work.
A. the, 不填 B.不填，不填 C. the, a D. an, the
9. Apartments in cities can be quite high. Renters are paying up to $$1,000 per
month for _______ bedroom apartment.
A. one a B. the one C. one D. a one
10. The education of ______ young is always ______ hot and serious topic.
A. 不填, 不填 B. the, a C. 不填, the D. the, 不填

11. I often have conversations with John over ______ telephone, while keep in
touch with Tom by ______ letter.
A. 不填；the B. 不填；a C. the；不填 D. the; a
12. — John has put forward _____ most challenging question for us to answer.
— Yes, it really is. I have never heard ______ harder one.
A. the; 不填 B. 不填; the C. the; the D. a; a
13. “What about ______ school?” “It is as good, as anybody can see, _____
school as No 1 Middle School Attached to Hunan Normal University.”
A. a; the B. the; a C. a; a D. the; the
14. The market for ______ used computers is getting larger and larger as______
years go on.
A. 不填, 不填 B. the, 不填 C. the, the D. 不填, the
15. “Charley Oakley, ______ NBA All-star, hasn’t missed ______ game in the past
three years.” “I can hardly believe it.”
A. an; the B. a; the C. the; a D. an; a
16. In the market, vegetables are sold by _______ kilogram, I mean, by _______
weight.
A. the; 不填 B.不填; 不填 C. the; the D.不填；the
17. Many people agree that ______ knowledge of English is a must in _______
international trade today.
A. the, an B. a, 不填 C. the, the D. 不填, the
18. The cakes are delicious. I’d like to have _______ third one as _______ second
one I ate was too small.
A. the, the B. a, the C. the, a D. a, a
19. ________ England of those years was _______ England in peace.
A. 不填, 不填 B. The, an C. The, 不填 D. 不填, an
20. — Did you happen to see _______ black and _______ white cat?
— Are they missing? I told you to take care of them.
A. a; 不填 B. the; 不填 C. the; the D. a; the

十五、数词
80

考试必备
数词的概念：表示数目多少或顺序多少的词叫数词，数词分为基数词和序数词。
表示数目多少的数词叫基数词；表示顺序的数词叫序数词。
I. 基数词
1）基数词写法和读法：
Eg: 345
6798
three hundred and forty-five
six thousand seven hundred and ninety-eight
英语语法
b. A + 谓语 + 倍数（分数）+ 形容词（副词）比较级+ than + B.
Eg: The grain output is 8 percent higher this year than that of last year.
This house is three times larger than that one.
c. A + 谓语 + 倍数（分数）+ the size (amount，length…) of + B.
Eg: The earth is 49 times the size of the moon. 地球是月球的49倍。
d. 还可以用by+倍数，表示增加多少倍
Eg: The production of grain has been increased by four times this year.

2）分数表示法
他们三三两两的到达了。
他三十多岁了。

2）基数词一般是单数形式，但下列情况，常用复数：
a. 与of 短语连用，表示概数，不能与具体数目连 用，如scores of people 指许多人；
b. 在一些表示一排或一组的词组里；
Eg: They arrived in twos and threes.
c. 表示几十岁；
Eg: He is in his thirties.
d. 表示年代，用 in +the +数词复数；
Eg: Tom was born in the 1980’s1980s. 汤姆出生于20世纪80年代。
e. 在乘法运算的一种表示法里。
Eg: 3 x 5 = 15 Three fives is (are) fifteen.

3) 当hundred, thousand, million, billion, dozen, score等词前有具体数字或
several等词时，这些词用单数形式；当其后有of 构成大约数时，他们用复数形式:
Eg: Two hundred students.

4）基数词-P.P. 构成复合形容词:
Eg: A three- legged table


II. 序数词
序数词的缩写形式： first---1st; second---2
nd
; thirty-first--- 31st

III. 数词的用法
1）倍数表示法
a. A + 谓语 + 倍数（或分数）+ as + adj. + as + B.
Eg: I have three times as many as you. 我有你三倍那么多。

81


一张三条腿的桌子。
一幢六层高的大楼。
两百个学生。
Hundreds of students attended the event. 成千上万的学生参加了活动。
构成：基数词代表分子，序数词代表分母。分子大于1时，分子的序数词用单数，分母
序数词用复数：
Eg: 13
337

高考英语数词陷阱题总结归纳
1. He is a student of ____.
A. Class Second
C. Class Two




B. the Class Two
D. Second Class
B. two-thousand-word
one-third
three and thirty-sevenths
2. He wrote a ____ composition.
A. two-thousand-words
C. two-thousands-word D. two- thousands-words
3. About ____ of the workers in that steel works are young people.
A. third-fifths B. three-fifths
A. thirtieth B. thirty
C. three-fives
C. thirty's
D. three-fifth
D. thirties
4. He began to write poems in his ____.
5. - When is your birthday?
- It's on Saturday____.
A. third March
C. three March






B. the third of March
D. the three of March
D. Two-nineths
A six-storeyed building.
6. ____ of the students in our class are from the south.
A. Two-nineth B. Two-ninth C. Two-ninths

考试必备
7. I've told him ____.
A. a hundred time

B. hundred times
D. hundreds of times C. hundred of times


A. a long time
英语语法

them
20. Flight BA 123 to Vienna is now boarding at ____.



A. Gate 21 B. 21st Gate C. the Gate 21 D. 21 Gate
21. Bill bought three books, ___ in Japanese, __ in French and __ in Chinese.
A. the first; the other; the third B. one; the other; a third
C. one; another; the third D. one; the other; another
A. three of them B. three them C. the three of them D. some of

8. They have been in the reading-room since ____.
B. it had been open C. eight o'clock D. two hours
9. I'll never give up not even on ____ try.
A. the 1,000 or 10,000 B. the 1,000 and 10,000
D. the 1,000th and 10,000th C. the 1,000th or 10,000th 22. According to a new survey, unemployment was at 6. 2%, half that in France,
____ Germany.
A. a third fewer than
C. a third less than
A. two


B. third less than
D. a third under
C. a second D. seconds
10. Do you know when ____ broke out?
A. Second World War B. the Second World War
C. World War Second D. the World War Two
11. The price was reduced ____.
A. by 20 percents





B. by 20 percent
D. on 20 percent
C. two-ninth as D. two as
C. by percent of 20
A. half as
23. He failed once. Then he tried____ time.
B. the second

24. My father served in the army in ____ when he was in____.
A. 1950's; twenties B. the 1950's; his twenties
C. the 1950's; the twenties D. 1950's; the twenties
25. You can't imagine that rats eat 40 to 50 times ____.
C. the two one

D. the second one

A. in weight B. by weight

十六、代词
代词的概念：是代替名词的词或者起名词作用的短语和句子的词。
代词的分类：
1. 人称代词； 2. 物主代词； 3. 反身代词； 4. 指示代词；
5. 疑问代词； 6. 关系代词；7. 不定代词。
代词之间有两点共同之处：
1.
2.
它们本身的词义都很弱，必须从上下文来确定；
许多代词都有两种功能：一是可单独取代名词的位置，二是可起修饰的作用。初
D. hundred of
C. of weight D. their weight
12. This map is ____ small as that one.
B. as half
13. Ask him to give me ____.
A. the two


B. the second


14. By 8:00，____ people had arrived, after a while ____ got there.
A. forty; forty-first B. eight; ninth
C. eleven; a twelfth



A. hundred
A. Two-five; is
D. nineteen; a twenty
C. hundreds of
15. There will be more than 3 ____ students taking part in the sports meet.
B. hundreds
16. ____ of the magazines ____ borrowed from the reading-room.
B. Two-fifth; is C. Two-fifths; are D. Two- fifths; is
B. one millionth the size
17. A nucleus（原子核） is about ____ of an atom（原子）.
A. one million the size
C. one million of
18. 9 ____ 3 is three.
A. divides by B. divided by C. is divided by D. divided into
19. You'll get ____ going and none will be left at home.

82
D. a million of 中阶段涉及的代词主要有：
代词的分类：
I． 人称代词：

考试必备 英语语法
物主代词有种类：
1) 形容词性物主代词
形容词性物主代词相当于形容词的性质，放在名词之前, 在句中常作定语。
Eg: His brother is an engineer.
My book is on the table.
Their friends are waiting for them.
2) 名词性物主代词
名词性物主代词相当于名词，后面不能接名词。在句中做主语、宾语和表语。
Eg: This is my pen. Yours is yellow.
My pen is broken. Please give me yours.
This house is ours。










III. 反身代词：

人称代词的概念：表示我你他 我们你们他们的词叫人称代词。人称代词并不
全指人，也指物。有三种人称，每个人称又分为单数和复数 （第二人称单数和复数同形）。
人称代词还有主格和宾格之分。它有人称、数和格的变化，其形式列表如 下表：

主格
宾格
形物代
名物代
第一
I
me
my
mine
第二
you
you
your
yours
第三男
he
him
his
his
第三女
she
her
her
hers
一复
we
us
our
ours
二复
you
you
your
yours
三复
they
them
their
theirs
物三
it
it
its
its
itself 反身代 myself yourself himself herself ourselves yourselves themselves

用法归纳：
1）人称代词主格在句中主要做主语。
Eg: We went to the zoo yesterday.
2） 人称代词宾格在句中主要作宾语。
Eg: Can you help me?
Eg: Who is that? It's me.
He is taller than me.







3）人称代词做表语时一般用宾格。
4)在比较状语从句中，在不引起误解的前提下，有时用宾格代词代替主格代词。Eg:

He loves you more than me.
a) 单数人称代词：you he I.
Eg: You, he and I are good friends. 你我他都是好朋友。
b) 复数人称代词为：we you they.
Eg: We and they went to the Great Wall yesterday.
c) 第三人称He和 she 同时使用时，先说he,后说she.
Eg: He and she were late for school this morning.

II. 物主代词：
物主代词的概念： 表示所有关系的代词, 它与人称代词一样，也分第一人称、第二人
称、第三人称，每个人称分单数和复数。 （见上表）

83

反身代词的概念：表示反射（指一个动作反射到该动做执行者本身 ）或者强调（即用来
加强名词或代词的语气）的代词叫反身代词。它是由第一人称、第二人称形容词性物 主代词
和第三人称代词宾格，后面加词尾self 或者selves构成。
1) 反身代词与它所指代的名词或代词形成互指关系，在人称、性、数上保持一致。
Eg: He saw himself in the mirror. (反身代词himself 与主语he 是指同一个人)
I teach myself English in my spare time.
2) 反身代词还可以用于名词或代词之后或句末，表示强调。
Eg: I myself did it. = I did it myself.
He himeself told me the news. = He told me the news himself.
3) 反身代词在句中可用作动词宾语、介词宾语、表语和同位语。
Eg: He made himself seen by waving his arm.
I believe in myself.
IV. 指示代词:
指示代词的概念：用来指示或标识人或事物的代词。
主要有：
this这个 that那个 these这些
such 这样的 same同样的 so这样
those那些
it它

5）两个以上的代名词并行排列时，其次序为：

考试必备
表语、定语和状语。
Eg: These are my pens.
I will do that.





这些是我的钢笔。
我愿意做那件事。
这个地图是我哥哥的。
英语语法
someone
somebody
something
a.
b.



anyone
anybody
anything
no one
nobody
nothing
everyone
everybody
everything

指示代词所指的对象取决于谈话双方都熟悉的语境。指示代 词在句中可用做主语、宾语、
第二部分为-one, -body 的复合代词只用于指人。
一般认为，第二部分为-one 的复合代词与第二部分为-body 的复合代词的功能
This map is my brother's. Eg: Is there anyone at home? 家里有人吗？
和意义完全相同，可以互换，只是前者比后者文雅些。
Eg: Nobody knew her. 没有人认识她。
c.
d.
第二部分为-thing 的复合代词只用于指物。
第二部分为-thing 的复合代词和第二部分为-one, -body的复合代词一样，其形
Eg: There is something wrong with the bike. 这辆自行车有毛病了。
容词必须后置。
Eg: Is it something important? 事情重要吗？

4) many 和much的用法
这两个词的意思是：许多，大量。它们的不同在于：many只能修饰复形可数名词 ，much
一般只能修饰不可数名词。
Eg: There are many people in the room. 房间里有许多人。
Much of the time was wasted.

5) few , a few 和little, a little 的用法：
a few 和a little是一对用作表示数量的不定代词的固定词组。 意思为：少数，少量。 其
意义是肯定的。 A few修饰复形可数名词，a little修饰不可数名词。
Eg: I have a few friends here.

我在这里有几个朋友。
瓶子里有一点儿水。 There is a little water in the bottle.
修饰不可数名词。
Eg: He has few friends and lives lonely.
There is little water in the bottle.

VI. 疑问代词
84
他没有什么朋友，过着孤独的生活。
瓶子里没有水了。
很多时间浪费了。
This (these) 指近的事物。that (those) 指远的事物。
Eg: These are my books. Those aren't my books.

V. 不定代词
不定代词的概念：不指明代替任何特定名词或形容词的代词。
不定代词的分类：
1．普通不定代词： some, something, somebody, someone,
any, anything, anybody, anyone,
no, nothing, nobody, no one,
every, everything, everybody, everyone,
2．数量不定代词： much, many, little, a little, few, a few;
3．不定代词的具体用法：
1） 不定代词some和 any具有名词和形容词 的性质，既可指人，也可指物。通常修
饰复数可数名词或不可数名词，意思是：几个，一些。Some 用于肯定句或部分疑问句中, 含
有some 的疑问句大多表示请求或建议，希望回答同意)。Any一般用于否定句
或疑问句中。
Eg: He asked me some questions.
There isn't any water.

2） 不定代词no 表示否定，意思是：没有，不是。可修饰单数、复数可数名词和不可
数名词。
Eg: He has no friends in this city.

3） 复合不定代词的用法：
some，any，every，no 都可以与body，thing，one 构成不定代词，在用法上保持some，
any，every，no 的特点。这些复合代词均只有名词性质。

在这个城市里他没有朋友。



他问了我一些问题。
没有一点儿水。
Few和little 具有否定的意义， 意思为：几乎一点儿没有。 Few修饰可数名词，little

考试必备
疑问代词的分类：who(谁，主格)

whom（谁，宾格） whose（谁的）
英语语法
9. “Who told you?” “Oh, somebody or other, I’ve forgotten _____.”
A. what
A. what




B. when
B. when




C. which

D. who
D. whom

疑问代词的概念：疑问代词是用来构成特殊疑问句的代词。一般放在疑问句的句首。
what（什么） which （哪个） 10. Some of the students were late for the meeting, but I can’t remember ___.
C. which
11. These trousers are dirty and wet — I’ll change into my _____.
其中who，whom，whose只能指人，who 做主语，whom做宾语， what和 which
可指人或者物。
Eg: Who told you that?












是谁告诉你那件事的？
你们在谈论谁？
这些是谁的书？
你正在干什么？
你最喜欢哪种颜色？
Whom are you talking about?
Whose books are these?
What are you doing?

高考英语代词陷阱题总结归纳
1. _____ with any common sense can tell the difference between the two.
A. Who
A. Who
buy one.
A. like, want
A. any


B. likes, wants
B. any other
C. likes, want
C. other
D. like, wants
D. another
4. Everyone knows that Canada is larger than _____ country in Asia.
5. China is larger than _____ country in Asia.
A. any B. any other C. other
_____ of them.”
A. what, both B. what, none C. which, both D. which, none
7. “Would you like a cup of coffee or a glass of beer?” “____ will do, but milk
is _____ popular with me.”
A. Neither, not B. Both, more C. Either, the most
A. where

B. what C. how
D. All, the most
D. which
85
8. I read about it in some book or other, does it matter _____ it was?
D. another
6. “What do you think of them?” “I don’t know _____ is better, so I’ve taken



B. Whoever
B. Whoever




C. Anyone
C. Anyone


D. Who ever
D. Who ever
2. _______ has any common sense can tell the difference between the two.
3. The dictionary is really useful. Every boy and girl _____ it and they each _____ to
A. another
to _____.
A. other
A. other
A. other
A. other
A. another
A. another
A. all
B. trousers C. others D. other
12. Her lecture was hard to follow because she kept jumping from one subject




B. the other
B. the other
B. the other
B. the other








C. the others
C. the others
C. the others
C. the others


D. another
D. another
D. another
D. another
Which color do you like best? 13. Those cakes look delicious. Could I have _____ one?
14. I have many such novels. I’ll bring _____ tomorrow.
15. Saying is one thing and doing is _____.
16. Shut ____ eye, Jim.
B. some other
B. some other
B. each


C. other
C. other





D. the other
D. the other
D. either
D. anywhere
17. It’s sometimes hard to tell one twin from _____.
18. There are four bedrooms, ______ with its own bathroom.
C. every

19. “It’s said that he is a wise leader.” “Oh, no, he is _____ but a wise leader.”
A. anything
A. anyone
A. Anyone
A. Anyone
A. anyone
B. anyone



C. anybody

20. Tell _______ you like — it makes no difference to me.
B. who C. whoever D. what
D. Everyone
D. Everyone

21. _____ comes is welcome.
B. Who
B. Who
C. Anyone who
C. Whoever


22. _____ comes to see me, tell him I’m out.
23. Sarah hopes to become a friend of _____ shares her interests.
B. whomever C. whoever D. no matter who

考试必备
24. It was a matter of _____ would take the position.
A. who B. whoever C. whom
英语语法
A. other, another
D. whomever








B. others, another
D. the others, others

C. others, the other

25. The teacher told us that the problem was not _____ easy and that we should
think _____ over carefully.
A. such, it
A. another
B. that, it C. such, 不填 D. that，不填
26. The camera isn’t good enough; I want to change ______.
B. a good one
B. anything


C. it with another D. it for another



C. something D. nothing

27. I agree with most of what you said, but I don’t agree with ______.
A. everything
28. ______ likes money, but money is not ______.
A. Everyone, everything
C. Someone, nothing
A. anybody
A. anybody
fruit and tea.”
A. something B. anything C. everything D. nothing
32. “If you want a necklace, I’ll buy one for you at once.” “Oh, no. A
necklace is not _____ that I need most.
A. anything
A. anything
A. anything
A. anything
A. anything





B. something
B. something
B. something
B. something
B. something





C. nothing
C. nothing
C. nothing
C. nothing
C. nothing





D. everything
D. everything
D. everything
D. everything
D. everything
33. It’s not _____ that we want to talk about; let’s change the subject.
34. It’s not _____ I enjoy; I do it purely out of a sense of duty.
35. Self- control is not _____ that comes with your birth.
36. This is not _____ that would disturb me anyway.
37. Some say one thing, but _____.

86


B. Anyone, anything
D. Nobody, everything


C. somebody
C. somebody
D. nobody
D. nobody
38. He is a hard-working student, _____ who will be successful in whatever career
he chooses.
A. that
A. one
A. it
A. that








B. he
B. it
B. that
B. it















C. one



D. which
D. which
D. this
D. what
39. A table made of steel costs more than _______ made of wood.
C. those
C. one
C. one



40. “Why don’t we take a little break?” “Didn’t we just have _____?”
41. The question is _____ of great importance.
42. She wants a Mexican carpet, but she can’t afford to buy ______.
A. one B. it C. them D. the one
43. Meeting my uncle after all these years was an unforgettable moment, _____ I
will always treasure.
A. that

◆精编陷阱题训练◆
1. Tom’s mother always told him not to smoke again, but _____ didn’t help.
A. he B. it



C. which
C. another


D. as
D. the other
2. Both teams were in hard training; _____ was willing to lose the game.
A. either
to carry home.
A. that, that
A. that
A. what
A. such







B. what, what
B. for
C. which, what


C. what
C. anything

D. as, which


D. 不填
D. that
4. I know nothing about the accident except _____ I read in the paper.
5. Energy is ____ makes one work.
B. something
B. so
6. Don’t go to _____ places where there is no fresh air.
C. those D. which
B. neither
3. There he pointed to _____ looked like a stone and said that’s ______ you had
B. one C. it D. what
29. “Is there ______ here?” “No, Bob and Tim have asked for leave.”
B. everybody
B. everybody
30. “Is there ______ here?” “Yes, I’m upstairs. Please come and help me.”
31. “Do you have _____ at home now, Mary?” “No, we still have to get some

考试必备
7. The classroom is almost empty, where is _____?
A. someone
A. nothing
A. It, that
A. that


B. anyone
B. none










C. everyone
C. no one
D. no one
8. I’m afraid we can’t have coffee; there’s _____ left.
D. no any
9. _____ worries me is _____ we’re going to pay for all this.
B. That, how
B. what
C. What, how D. As, that
C. which



D. how
10. He just does ______ he pleases and never thinks about anyone else.
11. _____ of you comes first will get the ticket.
A. Which
A. that
A. one


B. Whichever


B. which
B. it
C. Who




C. as
C. that
D. Whatever
D. what


D. him
12. His income is double _____ it was five years ago.
13. If you want a friend, you’ll find _____ in me.
14. Oh, how beautiful it is! I like _____ better.
A. everything
A. whose else’s
A. Anyone
B. anything C. nothing
英语语法
A. either
A. either
same to me.”
A. one B. any C. another D. some
23. “Susan, go and join your sister cleaning the yard.” “Why ______? John is
sitting there doing nothing.”
A. him

十七、连词
连词的概念：连词是用来连接词,短语,从句或句子的词.连词不作成分.
连词的分类：
1. 表示并列关系的连词有：and, both…and…, not only… but also…和
neither…nor…等
D. something 1) and：和，并且
A：基本用法：
B. he C. I D. me


B. neither
B. each


C. any



D. none
D. it
21. “There’s coffee and tea; you can have _______.” “Thanks.”
C. one
22. “When shall we meet again?” “Make it _______day you like; it’s all the

15. Do you know _______ friends are coming to our party?
B. who’s else C. whose else D. who else’s
D. No matter who
D. no matter
16. _______ leaves the room last ought to turn off the lights.
B. The person C. Whoever
B. anyone
17. Jane hopes to become a friend of _______ shares her interests.
A. whomever
who
18. Some friends tried to settle the quarrel between Mr and Mrs Smith without
hurting the feeling of _______, but failed.
A. none B. either C. all D. neither
19. —Here are the best styles of the clothes. Which one do you like?
— _______. They are not so nice as I expected.
A. Neither B. All C. Nothing D. None
20. Mr Ascot, headmaster of the school, refused to accept ______of the three
suggestions made by the Students’ Union.

87
C. whoever
“and”表示 “和”、“并且”的意思，用来连接对等关系的字和字，片语和片语，句
子和句子。
Eg: I enjoy basketball , football and table tennis.
The weather becomes colder and colder.
B: 特别用法：
祁使句后连接and，有条件句作用，句式结构为：
V + O + …，and + S + wil + V + O +…
= If + S + V+ O + …，and + S + wil + V + O +…
Eg: Go straight on, and you’ll see the library.
=If you go straight on, you will see the library.
2)
A.
B.
both…and…既…也…,(两者)都…
both…and…构成的词组作主语时,谓语动词用复数。
both…and…否定句表示部分否定。
Eg: Both Jim and Kate are from England.

考试必备
Eg: You can’t speak both German and English.
Both my father and my mother aren’t doctors.
3) neither…nor…:既不…也不…
neither…nor…连接两个并列主语时,谓语动词靠近哪个主语就与哪个主语保持 “人
称”和 “数”的一致，即采取就近原则。
Eg: Neither I nor he has seen the play before.
4) not only…but also…:不但…而且…
英语语法
A． either…or…连接两个并列主语时,谓语动词靠近哪个主语就与哪个主语保持 “人
称”和 “数”的一致，即就近原则。
Eg: Either you or I am right.
Does either she or they like English?
B. 由either…or…引导的否定句是完全否定。
Eg: She isn’t either a student or a teacher.
3)

4. 表示因果关系的并列连词有：for(因为)，so(所以)。
Eg: He is not at school today, for he has a bad cold.
表示转折关系的连词有：but, however, yet, still，while等。 It was late, so I went home.

5.
whether…or…不管…还是…
Eg: She is always cheerful, whether at home or at school.

not only…but also…连接两个主语后的谓语动词也遵循就近原则。并且，当Not only
在句首时，其后的句子要使用倒装句。
Eg: Not only the mother but also the children are ill.

2.
Eg: Mary was a nice girl, but she had one shortcoming.
Tom got up early, yet he failed to catch the train.
He was very tired, still he kept on walking.
Your composition is fairly good, however, there is still some room for
improvement.
Jane is hard working ,while her sister is quite lazy.

3.
1)
A.
表示选择关系的并列连词有：or, either…or…,whether… or…等。
or：或、否则
基本用法
引导时间状语从句的从属连词有：before, after, when, while, as, till, until, since,
as soon as等。
Eg: After they had planted their crops, they took a rest.
We have learned six lessons since he began to teach us.
As soon as he gets to Beijing, he’ll call me.
1) when, while, as 都表示“当……时”，when从句谓 语动词既可以是瞬间动词
也可以是延续性动词，可用于主从句动作同时发生或从句动作先于主句动作发生 。while从
句谓语动词只能是延续性动词，侧重主从句动作同时发生。as引导一个持续性动作，多 用于
主从句动作同时发生，强调“一边……一边”。
Eg: When I came in, my father was cooking.
I came in whenwhile my father was cooking.
He sang as he walked.
2) until用法：当主句谓语动词是延续性动词时，主从句都用肯定式，译为“ 直到……
为止”；当主句谓语动词是瞬间动词时，主句用否定式，从句用肯定式，即not…..unt il, 译
为“直到……才”。
Eg: Mr. Green waited until his children came back.
格林先生一直等到他的孩子们回来。
Mr. Green didn’t go to bed until his children came back.
88
or 表示 “或” 的意思，使用于两者之中选择一个的时候。
Eg: ----Is your friend English or American?
----American.
He doesn’t like dumplings or noodles.
B. 特别用法
祁使句后连接or ，表 “如果…,否则…”,有转折的意思，此时
or =if you don’t …,you’ll …
Eg: Hurry up, or you’ll be late.=If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.
2)

either…or…:或者…或者…; 不是…就是…；要么…要么…

考试必备
格林先生直到他的孩子们回来才睡觉。

6. 引导条件状语从句的从属连词有：if(如果), unless(除非，如果……不)等。
Eg: If you don’t go soon, you’ll be late.=Unless you go soon, you’ll be
late.
You will fail the exam unless you start reviewing your lessons now.

7. 引导原因状语从句的从属连词有：because, as, since等。
英语语法
He got there so early that he got a good seat.
It is such a heavy box that nobody can move it.

11. 引导比较状语从句的从属连词有：as…as…(与……一样),not asso… as…(不及，
赶不上),和than(比)等。
Eg: I know you better than she does.
He works as carefully as she.
I can’t run asso fast as you.

12. 引导名词性从句的从属连词有：that和 ifwhether(是否)等。
Eg: We know that the earth goes around the sun.(宾语从句)
I wonder if he has received my e-mail. (宾语从句)
Whether he’ll go there hasn’t been decided.(主语从句)

because“因为”语气最强,回答why 提问时只能用because，其引导的从句可放在句
首或句末；as“由于”、since“既然”语 气不如because强，引导的从句常置于句首；for
是并列连词，语气最弱，对前面分句加以解释 或补充说明，其引导的分句常置于句末且用逗
号隔开。
Eg: He didn’t go to school because he was ill.
As it was raining, we went there by bus.
Since everybody is here, let’s begin.
It must have rained last night, for the ground is wet.
注意：because与 so不能同时使用。

8. 引导让步状语从句的从属连词有：althoughthough(虽然，尽管),
even thougheven if (即使)
Eg: AlthoughThough it is a very young country, it is very rich.
Even ifthough you were here yesterday, you couldn’t help him.
注意：althoughthough 引导的从句不能与but连用，但可与yet, still连用。

9. 引导目的状语从句的从属连词有：so that和in order that(以便，为了)等。
Eg: The teacher spoke loudly so that in order that we could hear him clearly.
He reads English every day in order that he can learn it

10. 引导结果状语从句的从属连词有：so that(结果是)和sosuch…that…(如此…以至
于)等。
Eg: It was very cold, so that the water in the bowl froze.

89
注意：在时间状语从句和条件状语从句中，如果主句是将来时，从句要用一般现在时。
Eg: I’ll go on with the work when I come back tomorrow.
He won’t come unless he is invited.

高考英语连词陷阱题总结归纳
1. I don’t like reading watching TV. What about you? “I don’t like
reading all day, I like watching TV plays.”
A. and, but
A. until
A. but
B. and, and
B. after
B. and
C. or, and D. or, but
2. You won’t know the value(价值) of the health you lose it.
C. when D. because
C. or D. so
D. and
3. We bought Granny a present, she didn’t like it.
4. Study hard, you will pass the exam.
A. so B. for
A. and
C. but
5. Put on more clothes, you’ll catch cold.
B. for C. or D. but
6. My shoes are worn out, I need new ones.
A. so B. if C. because D. and

考试必备
7. He ran fast he won the race.
A. enough …to
A. either…or
A. neither…nor
B. so …that C. too…to
英语语法
十八、形容词、副词
D. both…and 形容词和副词的考点要求：
形容词和副词是高考考纲要求的重点词类，几乎每年每套试卷都有大量涉及。

高考对形容词和副词的考点主要涉及如下方面：
D. so…that
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C. since D. before
7.
形容词和副词的比较等级用法；
形容词后置的情况；
-ly结尾的形容词辨别；
定语形容词和表语形容词；
词形一致的形容词和副词；
形容词作定语及多个时的位置顺序；
同根副词辨析。

8. He is only ten months. He can read write.
B. neither…nor C. both…and D. so…that
B. nither…or

C. too…to
9. She said she might come Saturday Sunday .
10. If Tom Mike asks for their car, tell him to come tomorrow.
A. or B. and
A. that B. when
`A. so
C. with D. but
11. It was already ten o’clock we got to the museum this morning.
C. if D. for
12. It’s a long time we met last.
B. after
13. That maths problem is difficult nobody can do it.
A. too…to B. very…that
A. since B. before
to each other.
A. While B. If C. Since D. When
16. People often mistake us for each other we are twins.
A. if B. when C. because D. after
B. whether does it often snow
D. whether it often snows
C. for D. when
17. Could you tell me in your home town in winter?
A. if it often snowed
C. if it often snow
A. if B. that
A. Either…or
A. so that


90


C. so…that D. very …but
C. until D. as soon as
14. I’ll give her the message she comes back.
15. the teacher came into the classroom, many students were talking
1. 形容词和副词的原级比较、比较级及最高级：
1) as+原级+ as（as+原级+aan+单数可数名词+ as），其否定形式为：not asso+
原级+ as
Eg: Tom is as tall as his father.
Mary runs as fast as her best friend Tom.
Mary is not soas tall as her sister.
2) 比较级+than+比较对象（less+原级+比较对象）
Eg: Tom is taller than me.
Mary speaks English better than any other student in her class.
3) 比较级+and+比较对象或more and more +原级
Eg: Our living conditions are becoming better and better.
English has become more and more important in today’s world.
4) the+比较级…，the+比较级…
Eg: The more you practice, the better you will speak.
The longer, the better.
5) the+比较级+of the two
Eg: The taller of the two boys is my friend.
I’d like to buy the bigger of the two houses.
6) the+最高级（+单数可数名词）+ofamong+复数名词或in+单数名词
18. Are you sure Mr. Li will come to your birthday party?
19. Lily Lucy like singing.
B. Beither…nor … C. Both…and D. So…that
B. before C. until D. because
20. Read the sentences slowly we can understand what you read.

考试必备
Eg: Tom is the tallest of the three boys.

7)
This is the most beautiful park in Xi’an.
be one ofamong+ the+最高级+复数名词
英语语法

3. 要用名词表示“量”的倍数时，则用以下两个句型：
1) A + be + 倍数 + more + 名词(可数，不可数) + than + B.
Eg: There are four times more books in our library than in yours.
我们图书馆藏书(数量)是你们图书馆藏书的五倍。(我们图书馆藏书比你们的多四倍。)
We have produced twice more grain this year than we did last year.
我们今年生产的粮食比去年增长两倍。(是去年的三倍)

2) A + be + 倍数 + as many(或much) + 名词 + 其他 + as + B.

Eg: Mary is one of the most beautiful girls in our class.
English is one of the most important languages in the world.
8) the last+原级（+单数可数名词）+ofamong+复数名词或in+单数名词
Eg: He is always the last sttudent that comes to school.
The last one of the boys is Tom.
2.
两个句型。
1) A + be + 倍数 + as + 形容词 (或副词) + as + B.
Eg: Asia is four times as large as Europe． 亚洲的面积是欧洲的四倍。
This big stone is three times as heavy as that one．
这块大石头的重量是那块的三倍。(这块石头比那块重二倍)
The plane flew ten times as high as the kite．
那架飞机飞行高度是那个风筝的十倍。(高出九倍)

2) A + be + 倍数 + 形容词 (或副词) 的比较级 + than + B.
Eg: This rope is twice longer than that one．
这根绳的长度是那根绳的三倍。(比那根绳长二倍)
This hall is five times bigger than our classroom．
这个大厅比我们的教室大五倍。(是我们教室的六倍)
The car runs twice faster than that truck．
这辆小车的速度比那辆卡车快两倍。(是那辆卡车的三倍)

3)
Eg: This street is four times the length of that street．
这条街是那条街的四倍长。
This hill is four times the height of that small one．
这座山的高度是那座小山的四倍。(比那座小山高三倍)
也可用：The height of this hill is four times that of that small one．

91

用形容词表示甲是乙的几倍时，用下面三个句型，用副词表示则一般只用前
Eg: After the technique was introduced，the factory produced twice as many
tractors in 1988 as the year before．
采用新的技术以后，那个工厂1988年生产的拖拉机数量是前一年(1987年)的 两倍。(比
前一年增长一倍)
There is three times as much water in this pot as in that one．
这个壶里的水(量)是那个壶里的三倍。

4. 同级程度的比较，用as…as, the same as, such…as 引导：
Eg: Henry is a worker as good as Peter(is)．
=Henry is as good a worker as Peter(is)．
=Henry is such a good worker as Peter(is)．
亨利和皮特一样是个好工人。
Henry does not have so／as many book as I have．
亨利的书没有我的那么多。
His name is the same as his father's(name)．
他的名字和他爸爸的一样。
A + be + 倍数 + the size(length, width, height, depth, …) + of + B.
5. 含有名词的as...as结构需要注意词序的问题：
=a ＋ 名词单数 ＋ as ＋ adj．＋ as
Eg: He is as honest a man as you＝he is a man as honest as you.
句型A．as ＋ adj．＋ a／an ＋ 名词单数 ＋ as

考试必备
句型B．as many ＋ 名词复数 ＋ as
as much ＋ (a／an) ＋ 名词 ＋ as
英语语法
Eg: How beautifully she sings! I have never heard a better voice．

除了“the＋最高级”外，最高级还有其它表达方式。如：否定词never与比较级连用。
There is no greater love than that of a man who lays down his life for his friends．
为朋友而放弃生命的人的爱是最伟大的爱。
He has never spent a mole worrying day．
他度过了最忧心忡忡的一天。
Eg: It is generally believed that teaching is as much an art as it is a science．

句型C．倍数 ＋ as ＋ adj．＋ 名词 ＋ as
Eg: After the new technique was introduced，the factory produced twice as
many tractors in 2010 as the year before．
6. as…as， (not) so…as 结构中的形容词、副词只能用原级，不能用比较级。
Eg: John plays football as well as，if not better than，David．
7. the+比较级…，the+比较级…，表示“越……，越……”。
Eg: The more tickets you sell，the more money you will get．
你卖的票越多，挣的钱越多。
The more you talked，the less attention he paid to you.
你说得越多，他越不注意听你讲。
The longer you stay，the better(it will be)．
你呆的时间越长越好。
8. 比较级+and+比较级，表示“越来越……”。
Eg: The new city is becoming more and more beautiful．
这个新城市变得越来越美丽了。
9. the+比较级+of the two+名词：
Eg: The taller of the two boys is my brother．
两个男孩中的那个高的是我的弟弟。
10. 用介词by表示相差的程度。
Eg: She is taller than I by three inches．(=She is three inches taller than I．)
她比我高三英寸。
I missed the last train by one minute．
我差一分钟没赶上最后一趟火车。
11. 一个人的两种性质的比较。用more…than…结构：
Eg: Ann acts quite unfriendly． 安不是非常友好。
I think she’s more shy than unfriendly． 与其说她不友好，不如说她害羞。
12. 否定+比较级=最高级

13. 比较的对象不能相互包容。注意：
The Mississippi River is longer than any other river in the United States．
密西西比河比美国其他任何一条河都长。
The Mississippi River is longer than any river in China．
密西西比河比中国任何一条河都长。

14. 比较等级的修饰语：
1) 修饰原级：fairly, quite, rather, so, very, too等。
2) 修饰比较级：much, even, far, rather, still, any, no(而不用very, quite,
fairly, greatly等), a bit, a little, a head, two meters, a great deal, a lot, by far等
Eg: The students study even harder than before. 学生们比以前学习努力了。
A car runs a great deal faster than a bike. 汽车跑起来比自行车快许多。
3) 修饰最高级的有：序数词, by far, nearly, almost, by no means, not really, not
quite, nothing like。
Eg: The bridge being built now is by far the longest across the Yellow River．
I’d like to buy the second most expensive camera．

15. 比较的对象应该相同:
Eg: The weather here is warmer than that of Shanghai．
这里的气候比上海的暖和。
The radios made in our factory are better than those(made) in your factory．
我们工厂生产的录音机比你们工厂生产的好。
The population Of China is larger than that of any other country in the
world．(人口与人口相比，用代词that)
中国的人口比世界上其他任何一个国家的人口都多。
92

考试必备 英语语法
汤姆的作文如果不比杰克好，至少也和杰克一样好。

China has a larger population than any other country in the world．(国家和国家
相比较)
中国的人口比世界上其他任何一个国家的人口都多。
The director gave me a better offer than .
A. that of Dick’s ’s C. he gave Dick D. those of Dick

16. 比较状语从句中助动词的使用:
Eg: Bob looks younger than he does. 鲍勃看上去比实际年龄要年轻。
Bob looked younger than I did. 鲍勃比我年轻。
I know you better than he does. 我比他更了解你。
注意：no+比较级+than的特殊含义及一些特殊结构。
A is no more careful than B. A和B两人都不仔细。
A is no less careful than B. A和B两人都很仔细。
A is not more careful than B. A不如B仔细o
A is not less careful than B. A的仔细程度并不弱于B。
In no country other than Britain can one experience four seasons in the
course of a single day．
没有一个国家像大不列颠一样，一个人能在一天当中经历四季。
More than one student was given away a ticket to the all-star concert．
不止一个学生得到全明星音乐会门票。
He ran rather than walked．so he fell to the ground．
他跑步而非走路，因此他摔倒了。

17. 注意比较结构中的省略现象：
在日常交际中，彼此都明白的比较对象往往省略。如：
— What do you think of the film?
— I have never seen a better one．(后边省略了than this film)
— 你认为这部影片怎么样?
— 我从未看过比这个更好的电影。
Tom’s composition, if not better, is at least fits good as Jack’s.
(在better后边省略了than Jack’s),

The pianos in the other shop will be cheaper, but not as good.
(在good后边省略了as the ones in this shop)
其他商店里的钢琴比这家商店里要便宜，但不如这里的好。
这种省略现象给正确判断造成一定的障碍，在高考题中出现频率较高，应引起足够的重
视。

18. 多个形容词作定语时的排列顺序：
当两个以上的形容词修饰一个名词时，与被 修饰的名词关系较密切的形容词靠近名词；
如果几个形容词的密切程度差不多，则音节少的形容词在前， 音节多的在后。如：a small
wonderful gift.
常用的顺序为：限定 词(these，those)+数量形容词(three)+描绘性形容词(beautiful)+大小、< br>长短、高低等形体性形容词(large，long，high)+新旧(old)+颜色(red)+国 籍(Chinese)+材
料(wood)+用途(writing)+被修饰名词(desk)。
为了方便记忆，不妨试试如下口诀：
限定描述大长高，形状年龄与新老；颜色国籍出材料，用途类别往后靠。
Eg: all these last few days 最近的这些日子
a light blue silk skirt 一件浅蓝色丝裙
the first／last two paragraphs 最前／最后两段
another three English books 另外3本英语书
some beautiful little red flowers 一些美丽的小红花
all old brown woolen carpet 一件破旧的棕色羊毛毯
all expensive purple cotton dress 一件昂贵的紫色棉衣
a beautiful white Japanese military jeep 一辆漂亮的白色日本军用吉普车
the first beautiful little white Chinese wood bridge
第一座美丽的中国小白木桥

19. 形容词后置的情况：
1) 修饰不定代词something, anything, nothing, everything等时：
There is something difficult in this book.
2) 形容词后面有介词短语或不定式短语的时候：
93

考试必备
This is a student worth of praise.
3)
英语语法
1) “the＋比较级”特指两人或两个事物中较为突出的一个。
用and或or连接两个形容词通常放在被修饰的名词之后，起强调修饰的作用： Eg: If the manager had to choose between the two, he would say John was

They will turn their motherland into a country, beautiful and modern.
4) 形容词同表示数量的词组连用时亦放在后面：
The pipe is twelve feet long.

20. -ly结尾的形容词：
Eg: costly 昂贵的 lonely 孤独的 deadly 死一般的
lively 活泼的 friendly 友好的 silly 傻气的
kindly 热心肠的 likely 可能的 leisurely 悠闲的
ugly 长得丑的 brotherly兄弟般的 monthly 每月的
earthly 尘世的 lovely 可爱的

21. 以“a”开头的很多形容词只能做表语：
Eg: afraid 害怕的 alike 相象的 awake 醒着的
alone 单独的 alive 活着的 ashamed 羞愧的
asleep 睡着的 aware 意识到的、察觉到的

22. 同根副词辨析：
Eg: close 接近地 closely 仔细地，密切地
free 免费地 freely 自由地，无拘束地
hard 努力地 hardly几乎
late 晚，迟 lately 近来
most 极，非常 mostly 主要地
wide 广阔地 widely 广泛地
high 高 highly 高度地，非常地
loud 大声的 loudly 大声地（含有喧闹意思）
deep 深，迟 deeply 抽象意义上的“深”
near 邻近 nearly 几乎

23. 易错点点拨：

the better choice.
2) senior(年长的，高级的)，juni or(年幼的，初级的)，superior(优越的)，inferior(下
等的，低劣的)等词与 to连用，表示比较级。
Eg: He is three years senior to me．他比我大三岁。
3) 注意下列结构中各个词的排列顺序：
what + aan+形容词+可数名词单数
what+形容词+不可数名词名词复数
such +aan+形容词+可数名词单数
such+形容词+不可数名词名词复数
no such+名词（名词前不能加冠词）
4) so manyso muchso fewso little+名词（其中的many, much, few, little等
词都表“多少”之意，little还可当“小”解释，这时用such little+名词）。
5) 固定句型“cannotcan never be too...”的考查，意为“越……越好”或“再……
也不过分”。
6) 当too...to...结构中的副词too后接apt, ready, anxious, eager, glad, willing等
形容词时，该结构表达的即为肯定的含义。
Eg: She is too willing to marry him. 她很愿意嫁给他。
7) 当too...to...结构中的副词too前面有all, but, only, quite等修饰时，该结构表达
的也为肯定的含义。
Eg: I am only too pleased to help you. 我很高兴帮助您。

形容词、副词专题练习
1. I have seldom seen my mother ________ pleased with my progress as she is
now.
A. so B. very C. too D. rather
2. The island is ____ attractive in spring and autumn because of the pleasant
weather in both seasons.
A. partly B. merely C. nearly D. equally
3. Mr. Black is very happy because the clothes made in his factory have never
94

考试必备
been .
A. popular
smile.
A. Shy and cautious B. Sensitive and thoughtful
C. Honest and confident D. Lighthearted and optimistic
5. — Volunteering is becoming popular in China .
— Yeah, people are now aware that helping others is helping themselves.
A. naturally B. successfully
A. general
C. splendidly D. increasingly
D. particular
6. Drunk driving, which was once a occurrence, is now under control.
B. frequent C. normal
B. more popular C. most popular
英语语法
A. nowhere near enough B. near enough nowhere
D. the most popular C. enough near nowhere
make it easier to care for their children.
A. heavy B. smooth C. flexible D. complex
16. Studies show that people are more to suffer from back problems if
they always sit before computer screens for long. hours.
A. likely
A. curious
reliable than television.
A. accurate

_______.
A. though B. also C. either
grown too .
A. small B. few C. large D. many
22. In ancient times, people rarely travelled long distances and most farmers
only travelled the local market.


十九、It 的用法
1. 指代事物、动物、婴儿或未知的人：
Eg: It is a clock.
It is a wallet.
It is a dog.
The baby has woken up.
95

A. longer than B. more than C. as much as D. as far as
D. too
21. The school was moved out of downtown as the number of students had
B. immediate C. sensitive D. sudden
B. mostly C. rarely D. nearly
D. never
A. especially
B. ridiculous
B. frequently
C. urgent D. shallow
19. Do you think shopping online will __ take the place of shopping in stores?
C. merely D. finally
20. Playing on a frozen sports field sounds like a lot of fun. Isn't it rather risky,
B. possible C. probable D. sure
B. excited C. anxious D. careful
17. People have always ______ about exactly how life on earth began.
18. I have been convinced that the print media are usually more __ and more
D. near nowhere enough
15. Mothers holding jobs outside the home should have _______ schedules to

4. _______, she is the sort of woman to spread sunshine to people through her
7. In the lecture, I can only give you a purely view of how we can live life to
the full and make some suggestions about the future.
A. private B. personal C. unique D. different
8. Mistakes don’t just happen; they occur for a reason. Find out the reason,
and then making the mistake becomes .
A. favourable
the police.
A. physical
A. merely
10. I wasn`t blaming anyone; I said errors like this could be avoided.
11. Father ____ goes to the gym with us although he dislikes going there.
A. hardly B. seldom mes
12. Computers and mobile phones, though they are indeed making our
life and more , have reduced the need for face-to-face communication.
A. easily; efficient
C. easy; efficiently






B. easy, efficient
D. easily; efficiently
D. Meanwhile

B. precious C. essential D. worthwhile
9. If I find someone who looks like the suspect, my reaction will be to tell
13. Jim went to answer the phone. _______, Harry started to prepare lunch.
A. However B. Nevertheless C. Besides
14. We only had ＄100 and that was _______ to buy a new computer.

考试必备
Feed it.
It’s a girl.
Who is it that is knocking at the door?
2. 指天气、时间、距离、自然现象、环境等:
Eg: It is hot today.
It was cold yesterday.
It is 10 o’clock now.
It is Monday.
It is five kilometers from my home to school.
It is an earthquake.
It will be a storm.
It’s quiet here.
英语语法
5. 代替主语从句、宾语从句，作形式主语或形式宾语：
It seems appears happens turns out proves + that…
It is certain likely possible probable + that…
Eg: It seems that they have met before.
It happens that I have no money on me.


It is certain that we will win the game.
It is possible that he has left.

6. 用于强调句：
A. It iswas +被强调的部分 + that who…
A student witnessed the car accident at the turning last night.
主语 宾语 地点状语 时间状语
Eg: It was a student who witnessed the car accident at the turning last night.
It was the car accident that a student witnessed at the turning last night.
It was at the turning that a student witnessed the car accident.
It was last night that a that a student witnessed the car accident.
B. It iswas not until + 被强调的部分 + that…
Eg: I didn’t realize she was a famous film star until she took off her dark
glasses.
= It was until she took off her dark glasses that I realized her.








没好处
没用
没用
危险的
C. It iswas because + 被强调的部分 + that…
Eg: He didn’ t go to school yesterday because he had a headache.
= It was because he had a headache that he didn’t go to school yesterday.
7. S + appreciate love hatesee to(负责，注意) + it + 从句…
Eg: I would appreciate it if you can lend me 10 bucks.
I hate it when people spit on the street.
I will see to it that everything is ready before the meeting.
8. 其他重要句型：
It is important necessary right strange natural + that + S + (should) + V
+ O + A.
+ be + P.P. + A.
It is said reported learned…+ that…
96
3. 代替不定式，作形式主语或形式宾语(常与feel, consider, find, believe, make,
take, imagine, think, suppose, regard等连用)。
Eg: It feels good to swim in the river.
It took me ten years to master English.
I make it a rule to read English every morning.
I think it important for us to protect the environment.
4. 代替动名词，作形式主语或形式宾语：








It is no good + doing sth.
It is no use + doing sth.
It is useless + doing sth.


It is dangerous + doing sth.
S + think it no good + doing sth.
S + think it no use + doing sth.
S + think it useless + doing sth.
S + think it dangerous + doing sth.
It is no good wasting time.
Eg: It is no use waiting here.



I think it no use complaining about their prejudice.
I think it dangerous swimming in the river.

考试必备
+ V + O + A.
+ be + P.P. + A.
It is a pity a shame that + S + (should) + V + O + A.
+ be + P.P. + A.
It happens (seems, looks, appears ) that...
It occurs to sb. + to do that + Clause.
It ishas been + 一段时间 + since + S + V-ed + O.
It washad been + 一段时间 + since + S+ had + P.P. + O + A.
It will be + 一段时间 + before ...
It looks ( seems ) as if …
It is no wonder…：难怪
When it comes to…：当谈到……
It comes about that…：发生、结果
Eg: It comes about that he won the first prize again.

高考英语it 的用法陷阱题总结归纳
1. Everyone knows that _______ is dangerous to play with fire, but _______ is
difficult is to prevent children from playing with fire.
A. it, it B. what, what C. it, what D. what, it
英语语法
6. I’d prefer _______ if I didn’t have to get up early on Sundays.
A. that
A. this
_______ was.
A. he B. that C. she D. it
9. (1) Mr Smith is at the door. _______ wants to see you.
(2) Someone is at the door. ________ must be Mr. Smith.
A. He B. It C. This D. That


B. such
B. that






C. it
C. it




D. which
D. you

It is suggested orderedproposed recommended…+ that + S + (should)
7. I would appreciate _______ very much if you could give me some suggestions.
8. I’ve no idea. I just pretended nobody was at home, so I didn’t ask who
10. “Excuse me, I want to have my watch fixed, but I can’t find a repair shop.”
“I know ________ nearby. Come on, I’ll show you.”
A. one B. it C. some D. that
11. There is only one English-Chinese dictionary in that book- shop. I wonder if
you still want to buy _______.
A. it
A. it
A. it
A. me
D. what, it
A. it
A. it

◆精编陷阱题训练◆
1. Why shouldn’t I buy a new coat — I haven’t bought _____ for five years.
A. it
D. them
97
B. that C. one D. which
2. He made _____ known to his friends that he didn’t want to enter politics.






B. one
B. me
B. me














C. another D. any
D. them
D. them
D. them
D. them
D. them
12. Will you see to __ that my children are taken good care of while I am away?
C. yourself
C. which
C. it




13. I’ll see to _______ that all these letters will be sent to the post before twelve.
14. Will you see to _____ that the luggage is brought back as soon as possible?
B. yourself
B. me
B. me


15. You may depend on _______ that he will turn up in time.
C. which
C. which
16. I can’t answer for ________ that the boy is honest.
D. what, it
2. I know ______ is important to know my own limitations, but _______ is difficult is
to help others to know their own limitations.
A. it, it B. what, what C. it, what
3. Yes, ______ is difficult to find a job nowadays, but _____ is more difficult is try to
find such a job with a high salary but little things to do.
A. it, it
behind.
A. that B. those



C. it
C. it


D. them
5. I hate _______ if people say such things in public.
A. that B. those

B. what, what C. it, what
4. I dislike _______ when others laugh at me in public or think poorly of me

考试必备 英语语法
A. that B. it C. himself D. him
3. It used to be thought _____ the Earth was flat.
A. as B. when C. since D. that
4. The Parkers bought a new house but ______ will need a lot of work before they
can move in.
A. they B. it C. one D. which
5. _______ is well known _______ Hong Kong returned to China on July 1st, 1997.
A. It, that B. As, C. As, as D. It, which
6. — I don’t know whether I should go abroad or not, Mum.
— I leave _______ to your own judgment whether you should do it.
A. that B. it C. this D. what
7. Does ________ matter if he can’t finish the job on time?
A. this B. that C. he D. it
8. They are good friends. _____ is no wonder that they know each other so well.
A. This B. That C. There D. It
9. They live on a busy main road. ______ must be very noisy.
A. There B. It C. That D. They
10. Why don’t you bring ______ to his attention that you are too busy to do it?
A. this B. what C. that D. it
11. “Look at that lady on the stage. She’s already forty.” “You are joking.
She doesn’t look ________.”
A. so B. it C. that D. this
13. _______ was known to them all that William had broken his promise ______ he
would give each of them a gift.
A. As; Which B. What; that C. It; that D. It; which
14. In the west, people make _______ a rule to send Christmas present to their
relatives and friends.
A. this B. that C. it D. the following


高考英语单词拼写必背

98
I. 一个星期七天
y day ay ay

II. 一年十二个月
y ry
ber r er er
III. 一年四季

IV. 容易拼写错的数字亲属称呼
第八 第九 四十
h第十二 eth第二十
er(女儿) (侄女) (侄子)
(表兄弟、姐妹) (阿姨) (叔、舅)
V. 以下动词加-ed或-ing要双写最后一个字母
(regretted,regretting)后悔 l(controlled,controlling)控制
(admitted,admitting)承认 (occurred,occurring)出现
(preferred,preferring)宁愿 (referred,referring)提到
(forgetting)忘记 (permitted,permitting)允许
(equipped,equipping)装备
注意：quarrel,signal ,travel中的l可双写(英国英语)也可不双写(美国英语)
VI. 部分过去式和过去分词不规则变化的动词
ast(broadcast,broadcast)广播 (fled,fled)逃跑
(forbade,forbidden)禁止 e(forgave,forgiven)原谅
(froze,frozen)结冰
(作“绞死”讲，是规则的;作“悬挂”讲，其过去式过去分词都是hung)
(作“说谎”讲时，是规则的;作“位于”讲时，其过去式是lay，过去分词是lain)
(sought,sought)寻求 (shook,shaken)发抖
(sang,sung)唱歌 (sank,sunksunken)下沉
(spread,spread)传播 (swam,swum)游泳
(tore,torn)撕碎 (wove,woven)编织
VII. 意思相近的词

考试必备
xaminetest eaccept
ess

atecongratulate
英语语法
ydamage
将大大减轻我们的记忆负担。

4. A – B – C 型（原形、过去式、过去分词词形各不相同）。当我们将它们归类进行记忆时，
VIII. 注意形容词变名词时的拼写变化
—length长度 —width宽度
—height高度 —strength力量
IX. 以-ic结尾的动词，应先把-ic变为- ick，再加ing或ed
(picnicked,picnicking)野餐
X. 个别名词的复数拼写
(Germans) 德国人, Roman (Romans) 罗马人
(gulfs) 海湾
rchief(handkerchiefs)手帕
(英雄)，potato(土豆)，tomato(西红柿)，negro（黑人）等有生命的以-o
结尾的名词变复数时要加-es。
(roofs) 房顶
h胃(其复数是stomachs而不是加es)
XI. 注意动词变名词时的拼写变化
d—success成功 nce—pronunciation发音
n—explanation解释 —decision决定
—entrance进入 —permission允许
—refusal拒绝 er—consideration考虑
er—discovery发现 —burial埋葬
de—conclusion得出结论 —arrival到达
—weight重量


不规则动词表

英语中的动词通常都有 五种形式，分别是原形、单三、现在分词、过去式、过去分词。
大多数的动词都符合一定的变化规则，还 有一部分在变化时无规则，被称为不规则动词。不
规则动词的变化形式可分为四类：1. A – A – A 型 (原形、过去式、过去分词词形相同)；2.
A – B – A 型 （原形与过去分词词形相同）；3. A – B – B 型 （过去式、过去分词词形相同）；

99
下表即是归类后的不规则动词表，请同学们认真掌握。

1. A – A – A 型：
bet bet bet 赌
broadcast broadcast broadcast 播、播放
burst burst burst 发
cost cost cost 费
cut cut cut 伤、切割
hit hit hit 击
hurt hurt hurt 伤害
let let let 让、许可
misread misread misred misread misred 误读
must must ----- 必须
put put put 放置
read read red read red 读、阅读
rid rid, ridded rid, ridded 消除
set set set 建立、设置
shut shut shut 关闭
spread spread spread 传播、扩散
upset upset upset 沮丧

2. A – B – A 型：
become became become 变成
come came come 来
overcome overcame overcome 克服
run ran run 跑

3. A – B – B 型：
bend bent bent 弯曲、弯腰